WO2022193945A1 - 直连链路寻址方法及装置 - Google Patents

直连链路寻址方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022193945A1
WO2022193945A1 PCT/CN2022/078704 CN2022078704W WO2022193945A1 WO 2022193945 A1 WO2022193945 A1 WO 2022193945A1 CN 2022078704 W CN2022078704 W CN 2022078704W WO 2022193945 A1 WO2022193945 A1 WO 2022193945A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
address
link
direct link
tdls
direct
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/078704
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
黄国刚
蒙特穆罗麦克
麦肯斯蒂芬
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to AU2022235791A priority Critical patent/AU2022235791A1/en
Priority to JP2023557218A priority patent/JP2024511040A/ja
Priority to CA3213623A priority patent/CA3213623A1/en
Priority to KR1020237034796A priority patent/KR20230152764A/ko
Priority to EP22770300.6A priority patent/EP4294064A1/en
Priority to BR112023018589A priority patent/BR112023018589A2/pt
Publication of WO2022193945A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022193945A1/zh
Priority to US18/467,776 priority patent/US20240008113A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
    • H04W12/03—Protecting confidentiality, e.g. by encryption
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00—Network data management
    • H04W8/26—Network addressing or numbering for mobility support
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L69/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services independent of the application payload and not provided for in the other groups of this subclass
    • H04L69/22—Parsing or analysis of headers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/11—Allocation or use of connection identifiers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/14—Direct-mode setup
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/15—Setup of multiple wireless link connections
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00—Network data management
    • H04W8/005—Discovery of network devices, e.g. terminals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00—Network topologies
    • H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/10—Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/12—WLAN [Wireless Local Area Networks]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/12—Setup of transport tunnels
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/22—Manipulation of transport tunnels
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a direct link addressing method and device.
  • Multilink devices include access point (non-access point, AP) MLD and non-access point (non-access point, non-AP) MLD.
  • the AP MLD includes multiple APs
  • the non-AP MLD includes multiple station STAs.
  • the communication system includes at least one AP MLD and multiple non-AP MLDs
  • the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD can communicate through multiple links
  • the two non-AP MLDs can communicate through the AP MLD.
  • the communication system may also include station (station, STA) equipment.
  • the STA device includes one STA, and the STA device and the non-AP MLD can communicate through the AP MLD.
  • the communication between the two non-AP MLDs, or between the STA device and the non-AP MLD still needs to be forwarded through the AP MLD, which increases the transmission delay.
  • the industry has not yet provided a corresponding solution for how to establish a direct link for communication between the first non-AP MLD and the second non-AP MLD, or between the STA device and the non-AP MLD.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a direct link addressing method and device, which enables direct communication between a non-AP MLD and a non-AP MLD, or between a STA device and a non-AP MLD, thereby improving data transmission efficiency.
  • a first aspect provides a direct link addressing method, which is applied to a first device, where the first device includes one or more STAs, the first device is connected to a third device, and the third device includes multiple access points AP, the second device is connected to the third device, and the second device includes a plurality of STAs.
  • the direct link addressing method includes: determining protected data, and sending a first data unit. Wherein, the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the first device includes a STA
  • the first address is the address of the second device
  • the second address is the address of the first device
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the first AP is connected.
  • the first address is the address of the second device
  • the second address is the address of the first device
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the first data unit includes a first header, the first header is determined according to the protected data, and the first data unit is transmitted through a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the protected data is constructed using the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the first AP connected to the first device. .
  • the protected data is constructed by using the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the third device. Therefore, the first device can transmit the first data unit through the direct link between the first device and the second device, and the data transmission rate can be increased.
  • the device address is used to construct the protected data, and the change of the direct link does not affect the protected data. Re-encryption is required to further increase the data transfer rate.
  • the protected data may be additional authentic data (additional authentic data, AAD), and the first data unit may be a management protocol data unit (management protocol data unit, MPDU).
  • AAD additional authentic data
  • MPDU management protocol data unit
  • the first header may include a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device.
  • the first header may be an MPDU header.
  • the first header may include a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the STA corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the first device.
  • the address of the STA corresponding to the link, the sixth address is the address of the AP corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the first direct link is between the first device and the second device direct link.
  • the first data unit may include a tunneled direct-link setup (TDLS) frame
  • the TDLS frame may include a first element
  • the first element may be used to indicate the target link ID or the address of the AP corresponding to the target link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the target link is the second direct link applied by the TDLS frame
  • the second direct link is the link between the first device and the second device. direct link between.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS channel switch request (Channel Switch Request) frame or a TDLS channel switch response (Channel Switch Response) frame.
  • the TDLS Channel Switch Request is used to request the target link to switch from the current channel to another channel
  • the TDLS Channel Switch Response is used to indicate whether the target link is agreed or not to switch from the current channel to another channel.
  • the first device and the second device can switch the target link from the current channel to another channel for communication.
  • the TDLS Channel Switch Request/Response can be transmitted through any direct link.
  • the first element may be a link identifier element (Link Identifier element), or a newly defined element.
  • Link Identifier element link identifier element
  • the first element when the first device includes one STA, and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery request frame, the first element may be used to indicate the identification of the transmission link, or the connection between the multiple APs of the third device and the transmission link.
  • the address of the corresponding AP, and the transmission link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame. In this way, the Legacy STA and the second device can communicate through the direct link, which can improve the data transmission rate.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identification of the transmission link, or the connection between the multiple APs of the third device and the transmission link.
  • the address of the corresponding AP, and the transmission link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame. That is to say, the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery response frame in the TDLS frame is the same as the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery request frame in the TDLS frame. In this way, the Legacy STA and the second device can communicate through the direct link, which can improve the data transmission rate.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the link between the first device and the third device, or the third device
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the first device among the multiple APs, and the transmission link is the link for sending the TDLS discovery request frame.
  • the Legacy STA and the second device can communicate through the direct link, which can improve the data transmission rate.
  • the TDLS frame is a TDLS establishment response frame, a TDLS establishment confirmation frame, a TDLS teardown frame, a TDLS channel switching request frame, a TDLS channel switching response frame, and a TDLS peer energy-saving management request.
  • frame, TDLS peer-end energy saving management response frame, TDLS peer-end traffic indication frame or TDLS peer-end traffic response frame the specific implementation of the first element can refer to the above
  • the implementation manner of the first element is not repeated here. In this way, the non-AP MLD and the non-AP MLD can communicate through the direct link, which can improve the data transmission rate.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the reference link, or the reference link in the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the reference link may be the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element.
  • the first element when the first device includes multiple STAs, and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery response frame, the first element is used to indicate the identity of the public link that transmits the TDLS discovery response frame, or the number of multiples of the third device.
  • the common link is the link between the first device and the third device, the common link of the link between the second device and the third device, and the third device associated with the STA of the first device corresponding to the common link.
  • the AP of the device is the same as the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the second device corresponding to the public link. In this way, the non-AP MLD and the non-AP MLD can communicate through the direct link, which can improve the data transmission rate.
  • the first element is used to indicate the reference link identifier, or the first element.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device. In this way, the receiving end can know which device under which AP MLD is associated with which the frame is sent.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device. In this way, the receiving end can know which device under which AP MLD is associated with which the frame is sent.
  • the first data unit may include a tunnel direct link establishment TDLS frame, and the TDLS frame may include a wake-up scheduling element and a second element.
  • the offset field in the wake-up scheduling element is an offset relative to the first timing synchronization function threshold of the third direct link, and the second element can be used to indicate the identity of the third direct link or the third device.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS peer energy saving management request frame and a TDLS peer energy saving management response frame.
  • the TDLS Peer PSM Request/Response can be transmitted through any direct link, and the receiver can correctly parse the wake-up scheduling element.
  • the first data unit may include a third element, and the third element may be used to indicate that at least one fourth direct link is established on the first link.
  • the first link is a common link of the link between the first device and the third device and the link between the second device and the third device, and the first link may include at least one fourth direct link.
  • the first device and the second device can establish a direct link on the public link, so as to increase the data transmission rate.
  • the first link may be a public link between the first device and the third device, the second device and the third device, and the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the first device corresponding to the first link
  • the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the second device corresponding to the first link is the same.
  • the third element may include a direct link quantity field and a direct link identifier field, and the direct link quantity field may be used to indicate the quantity of the fourth direct link requested to be established,
  • the direct link identifier field may include an address of at least one AP or an identifier of at least one fourth direct link corresponding to the at least one fourth direct link respectively among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the fourth direct link can be established on part or all of the links of the first link, and the flexibility of establishing the direct link can be improved.
  • On which links the direct link is established may be indicated by the direct link identifier field.
  • the direct link identifier field may further include the address of the first STA of the first device and the address of the second STA of the second device. That is, the directly connected link identifier field may include addresses of subordinate STAs at both ends of the directly connected link.
  • the seventh address is bound with a TDLS peer key (TDLS peer key, TPK), and the seventh address is between the first device and the second device among the multiple APs of the third device
  • TPK TDLS peer key
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the directly connected link or the addresses of all APs of the third device, and the address of the third device. In this way, the security of communication between the first device and the second device through the direct link can be improved.
  • a direct link addressing method is provided, which is applied to a second device, where the second device includes multiple station STAs, the second device is connected to a third device, and the third device includes multiple access points AP, The first device is connected to the third device, and the first device includes one or more STAs.
  • the direct link addressing method includes: receiving a first data unit, and parsing the first data unit to obtain a first header. Wherein, the first data unit is transmitted through a direct link between the first device and the second device, and the first header may include a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device.
  • the fourth address is the address of the STA corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the first device.
  • the address of the STA corresponding to the link, the sixth address is the address of the AP corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the first direct link is between the first device and the second device direct link.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the second aspect may further include: obtaining the protected data according to the first header.
  • the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the first device includes a STA
  • the first address is the address of the second device
  • the second address is the address of the first device
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the The first AP is connected.
  • the first device includes multiple STAs
  • the first address is the address of the second device
  • the second address is the address of the first device
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the second aspect may further include: parsing the first data unit to obtain a tunneled direct-link setup (TDLS) frame, the TDLS frame
  • the frame may include a first element, and the first element may be used to indicate the identifier of the target link or the address of the AP corresponding to the target link among the multiple APs of the third device, and the target link is the second direct link applied by the TDLS frame
  • the second direct link is a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS channel switch request (Channel Switch Request) frame or a TDLS channel switch response frame (Channel Switch Response).
  • the TDLS Channel Switch Request is used to request the target link to switch from the current channel to another channel
  • the TDLS Channel Switch Response is used to indicate whether the target link is agreed or not to switch from the current channel to another channel.
  • the first element when the first device includes one STA, and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery request frame, the first element may be used to indicate the identification of the transmission link, or the connection between the multiple APs of the third device and the transmission link.
  • the address of the corresponding AP, and the transmission link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame.
  • the first element when the first device includes one STA, and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery response frame, the first element is used to indicate the identification of the transmission link, or the connection between the multiple APs of the third device and the transmission link.
  • the address of the corresponding AP, and the transmission link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame. That is to say, the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery response frame in the TDLS frame may be the same as the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery request frame in the TDLS frame.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the link between the first device and the third device, or the third device
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the first device among the multiple APs, and the transmission link is the link for sending the TDLS discovery request frame.
  • the TDLS frame is a TDLS establishment response frame, a TDLS establishment confirmation frame, a TDLS teardown frame, a TDLS channel switching request frame, a TDLS channel switching response frame, and a TDLS peer energy-saving management request.
  • frame, TDLS peer-end energy saving management response frame, TDLS peer-end traffic indication frame or TDLS peer-end traffic response frame the specific implementation of the first element can refer to the above
  • the implementation manner of the first element is not repeated here.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the reference link, or the reference link in the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the reference link may be the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element.
  • the first element when the first device includes multiple STAs, and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery response frame, the first element is used to indicate the identity of the public link that transmits the TDLS discovery response frame, or the number of multiples of the third device.
  • the common link is the link between the first device and the third device, the common link of the link between the second device and the third device, and the third device associated with the STA of the first device corresponding to the common link.
  • the AP of the device is the same as the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the second device corresponding to the public link.
  • the first element is used to indicate the reference link identifier, or the first element.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the second aspect may further include: parsing the first data unit to obtain a TDLS frame, and the TDLS frame may include a wake-up scheduling element and a second element.
  • the offset field in the wake-up scheduling element is an offset relative to the first timing synchronization function threshold of the third direct link, and the second element can be used to indicate the identity of the third direct link or the third device.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS peer energy saving management request frame and a TDLS peer energy saving management response frame.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the second aspect may further include: parsing the first data unit to obtain a third element, where the third element may be used to indicate that at least A fourth direct link.
  • the first link is a common link of the link between the first device and the third device and the link between the second device and the third device, and the first link may include at least one fourth direct link.
  • the third element may include a direct link quantity field and a direct link identifier field, and the direct link quantity field may be used to indicate the quantity of the fourth direct link requested to be established,
  • the direct link identifier field may include an address of at least one AP or an identifier of at least one fourth direct link corresponding to the at least one fourth direct link respectively among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the direct link identifier field may further include the address of the first STA of the first device and the address of the second STA of the second device.
  • the seventh address is bound with the TDLS peering key, and the seventh address may include a plurality of APs of the third device corresponding to the direct link between the first device and the second device The address of the AP or the addresses of all APs of the third device, and the address of the third device.
  • a direct link addressing method is provided, which is applied to a second device, where the second device includes multiple station STAs, the second device is connected to a third device, and the third device includes multiple access points AP, The first device is connected to the third device, and the first device includes one or more STAs.
  • the direct link addressing method includes: determining protected data, and sending a first data unit. Wherein, the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the first address is the address of the first device
  • the second address is the address of the second device
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the The first AP is connected.
  • the first address is the address of the first device
  • the second address is the address of the second device
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the first data unit includes a first header, the first header is determined according to the protected data, and the first data unit is transmitted through a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first header may include a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device.
  • the compatibility of the protocol is maintained.
  • the legacy STA can correctly parse the first data unit, so that the legacy STA and the non-AP MLD can communicate through the direct link, which can improve data transmission. rate.
  • the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the STA corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the STA of the second device that corresponds to the first direct link.
  • the address of the STA corresponding to the link, the sixth address is the address of the AP corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the first direct link is between the first device and the second device direct link.
  • the first data unit may include a tunnel direct link establishment TDLS frame
  • the TDLS frame may include a first element
  • the first element may be used to indicate an identifier of the target link or a plurality of third devices
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the target link in the AP, the target link is the second direct link applied by the TDLS frame, and the second direct link is the direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit may include a tunnel direct link establishment TDLS frame, and the TDLS frame may include a wake-up scheduling element and a second element.
  • the offset field in the wake-up scheduling element is an offset relative to the first timing synchronization function threshold of the third direct link, and the second element can be used to indicate the identity of the third direct link or the third device.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identifier of the reference link, or the reference link in the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the reference link may be the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element. In this way, protocol compatibility is maintained.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identification of the transmission link, or the connection between the multiple APs of the third device and the transmission link.
  • the address of the corresponding AP, and the transmission link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame. That is to say, the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery response frame in the TDLS frame may be the same as the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery request frame in the TDLS frame. In this way, protocol compatibility is maintained.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the link between the first device and the third device, or the third device
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the first device among the multiple APs, and the transmission link is the link for sending the TDLS discovery request frame. In this way, protocol compatibility is maintained.
  • the TDLS frame is a TDLS establishment response frame, a TDLS establishment confirmation frame, a TDLS teardown frame, a TDLS channel switching request frame, a TDLS channel switching response frame, and a TDLS peer energy-saving management request.
  • frame, TDLS peer-end energy saving management response frame, TDLS peer-end traffic indication frame or TDLS peer-end traffic response frame the specific implementation of the first element can refer to the above
  • the implementation manner of the first element is not repeated here. In this way, protocol compatibility is maintained.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the reference link, or the reference link in the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the reference link may be the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element.
  • the first element when the first device includes multiple STAs, and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery response frame, the first element is used to indicate the identity of the public link that transmits the TDLS discovery response frame, or the number of multiples of the third device.
  • the common link is the link between the first device and the third device, the common link of the link between the second device and the third device, and the third device associated with the STA of the first device corresponding to the common link.
  • the AP of the device is the same as the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the second device corresponding to the public link.
  • the first element is used to indicate the reference link identifier, or the first element.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device.
  • the first data unit may include a third element, and the third element may be used to indicate that at least one fourth direct link is established on the first link.
  • the first link is a common link of the link between the first device and the third device and the link between the second device and the third device, and the first link may include at least one fourth direct link.
  • the third element may include a direct link quantity field and a direct link identifier field, and the direct link quantity field may be used to indicate the quantity of the fourth direct link requested to be established,
  • the direct link identifier field may include an address of at least one AP or an identifier of at least one fourth direct link corresponding to the at least one fourth direct link respectively among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the direct link identifier field may further include the address of the first STA of the first device and the address of the second STA of the second device.
  • the seventh address is bound with the TDLS peer key TPK, and the seventh address may include a direct link between the first device and the second device in multiple APs of the third device The address of the corresponding AP or the addresses of all APs of the third device, and the addresses of the third device.
  • a direct link addressing method is provided, applied to a first device, where the first device includes one or more STAs, the first device is connected to a third device, and the third device includes multiple access points AP, the second device is connected to the third device, and the second device includes a plurality of STAs.
  • the direct link addressing method includes: receiving a first data unit, and parsing the first data unit to obtain a first header. The first data unit is transmitted through the direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first header may include a fourth address, a fifth address, and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device.
  • the fourth address is the address of the STA corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the second device.
  • the address of the STA corresponding to the link, the sixth address is the address of the AP corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the first direct link is between the first device and the second device direct link.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the fourth aspect may further include: obtaining the protected data according to the first header.
  • the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the first device includes a STA
  • the first address is the address of the first device
  • the second address is the address of the second device
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the The first AP is connected
  • the first device includes one STA.
  • the first device includes multiple STAs
  • the first address is the address of the first device
  • the second address is the address of the second device
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the direct link addressing method provided in the fourth aspect may further include: parsing the first data unit to obtain a tunnel direct link establishment TDLS frame, the TDLS frame may include the first element, the first An element can be used to indicate the identifier of the target link or the address of the AP corresponding to the target link among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the target link is the second direct link applied by the TDLS frame, and the second direct link It is a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identifier of the reference link, or the reference link in the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the reference link may be the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element.
  • the first element when the first device includes one STA, and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery response frame, the first element is used to indicate the identification of the transmission link, or the connection between the multiple APs of the third device and the transmission link.
  • the address of the corresponding AP, and the transmission link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame. That is to say, the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery response frame in the TDLS frame may be the same as the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery request frame in the TDLS frame.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the link between the first device and the third device, or the third device
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the first device among the multiple APs, and the transmission link is the link for sending the TDLS discovery request frame.
  • the TDLS frame is a TDLS establishment response frame, a TDLS establishment confirmation frame, a TDLS teardown frame, a TDLS channel switching request frame, a TDLS channel switching response frame, and a TDLS peer energy-saving management request.
  • frame, TDLS peer-end energy saving management response frame, TDLS peer-end traffic indication frame or TDLS peer-end traffic response frame the specific implementation of the first element can refer to the above
  • the implementation manner of the first element is not repeated here.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the reference link, or the reference link in the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the reference link may be the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element.
  • the first element when the first device includes multiple STAs, and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery response frame, the first element is used to indicate the identity of the public link that transmits the TDLS discovery response frame, or the number of multiples of the third device.
  • the common link is the link between the first device and the third device, the common link of the link between the second device and the third device, and the third device associated with the STA of the first device corresponding to the common link.
  • the AP of the device is the same as the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the second device corresponding to the public link.
  • the first element is used to indicate the reference link identifier, or the first element.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device.
  • the direct link addressing method provided in the fourth aspect may further include: parsing the first data unit to obtain a TDLS frame, and the TDLS frame may include a wake-up scheduling element and a second element.
  • the offset field in the wake-up scheduling element is an offset relative to the first timing synchronization function threshold of the third direct link, and the second element can be used to indicate the identity of the third direct link or the third device.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS peer energy saving management request frame and a TDLS peer energy saving management response frame.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the fourth aspect may further include: parsing the first data unit to obtain a third element, where the third element may be used to indicate that at least A fourth direct link.
  • the first link is a common link of the link between the first device and the third device and the link between the second device and the third device, and the first link may include at least one fourth direct link.
  • the third element may include a direct link quantity field and a direct link identifier field, and the direct link quantity field may be used to indicate the quantity of the fourth direct link requested to be established,
  • the direct link identifier field may include an address of at least one AP or an identifier of at least one fourth direct link corresponding to the at least one fourth direct link respectively among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the direct link identifier field may further include the address of the first STA of the first device and the address of the second STA of the second device.
  • the seventh address is bound to the TDLS peering key TPK, and the seventh address may include a direct link between the first device and the second device in multiple APs of the third device The address of the corresponding AP or the addresses of all APs of the third device, and the addresses of the third device.
  • a fifth aspect provides a direct link addressing method, which is applied to a first device, where the first device includes one or more STAs, the first device is connected to a third device, and the third device includes multiple access points AP, the second device is connected to the third device, and the second device includes a plurality of STAs.
  • the direct link addressing method includes: determining a first data unit, and sending the first data unit. Wherein, the first data unit includes a first header, and the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the The first AP is connected.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address corresponding to the sixth direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the address of the AP, and the sixth direct link is the link for transmitting the first data unit between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit is transmitted over a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit further includes a frame body, and the frame body may be a TDLS frame or data.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the first header is constructed by using the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the first AP connected to the first device.
  • the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the AP corresponding to the sixth direct link among the multiple APs of the third device are used to construct the first header, and the sixth direct link is used to construct the first header.
  • the link is a link for transmitting TDLS frames between the first device and the second device. Therefore, the first device can transmit the first data unit through the direct link between the first device and the second device, without forwarding by the third device, and the data transmission rate can be increased.
  • the setting method of the sixth address can be compatible with the case where the first device includes one STA and the first device includes multiple STAs, and frequent modification of the setting content of the sixth address can be avoided, thereby further reducing the transmission delay.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the TDLS discovery response frame is encapsulated into a common management frame and does not need to be encrypted, so the corresponding AAD structure cannot be determined.
  • a direct link addressing method is provided, applied to a second device, where the second device includes multiple station STAs, the second device is connected to a third device, and the third device includes multiple access points AP, The first device is connected to the third device, and the first device includes one or more STAs.
  • the direct link addressing method includes: receiving a first data unit, and parsing the first data unit to obtain a first header. Wherein, the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the The first AP is connected.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address corresponding to the sixth direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the address of the AP, and the sixth direct link is the link for transmitting the first data unit between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit is transmitted over a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the direct link addressing method provided in the sixth aspect may further include: parsing the first data unit to obtain a frame body, where the frame body may be a TDLS frame or data.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • a direct link addressing method is provided, applied to a second device, where the second device includes multiple STAs, the second device is connected to a third device, and the third device includes multiple access points AP, The first device is connected to the third device, and the first device includes one or more STAs.
  • the direct link addressing method includes: determining a first data unit, and sending the first data unit. Wherein, the first data unit includes a first header, and the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the The first AP is connected.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the address corresponding to the sixth direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the address of the AP, and the sixth direct link is the link for transmitting the first data unit between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit is transmitted over a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit further includes a frame body, and the frame body may be a TDLS frame or data.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • a direct link addressing method is provided, applied to a first device, where the first device includes one or more STAs, the first device is connected to a third device, and the third device includes multiple access points AP, the second device is connected to the third device, and the second device includes a plurality of STAs.
  • the direct link addressing method includes: receiving a first data unit, and parsing the first data unit to obtain a first header. Wherein, the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the The first AP is connected.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the address corresponding to the sixth direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the address of the AP, and the sixth direct link is the link for transmitting the first data unit between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit is transmitted over a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the eighth aspect may further include: parsing the first data unit to obtain a frame body, where the frame body may be a TDLS frame or data.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • a direct link addressing device includes: a unit or module for performing the method of any one of the first aspect, the fourth aspect, the fifth aspect, or the eighth aspect.
  • the direct link addressing device described in the ninth aspect may be the first device, or may be provided in a chip (system) or other components or assemblies of the first device.
  • a direct link addressing device includes: a unit or module for performing the method of any one of the second aspect, the third aspect, the sixth aspect, or the seventh aspect.
  • the direct link addressing device described in the tenth aspect may be the second device, or may be provided in a chip (system) or other components or assemblies of the second device.
  • a direct link addressing device in an eleventh aspect, includes a processor coupled to a memory for storing a computer program.
  • the processor is configured to execute the computer program stored in the memory, so that the direct link addressing device executes the direct link addressing method described in any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect to the eighth aspect.
  • the direct link addressing device described in the eleventh aspect may further include a transceiver.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit or an input/output port.
  • the transceiver may be used for the direct link addressing device to communicate with other devices.
  • the direct link addressing apparatus described in the eleventh aspect may be the first device or the second device, or a chip or a chip system disposed inside the first device or the second device.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a communication system.
  • the communication system includes a first device and a second device.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a chip system, the chip system includes a processor and an input/output port, the processor is configured to implement the processing functions involved in the first to eighth aspects, and the input/output port is used for In order to realize the transceiver functions involved in the first to eighth aspects.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing program instructions and data for implementing the functions involved in the first to eighth aspects.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, comprising: a computer program or an instruction; when the computer program or instruction is run on a computer, the computer is made to perform any one of the first to eighth aspects possible.
  • the direct link addressing method described in the implementation manner is implemented.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a computer program product, comprising a computer program or instructions, which, when the computer program or instructions are run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the possible implementations of the first to eighth aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD participating in communication provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of a Multi-link element provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of a Link Identifier element provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of an AAD provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of an MPDU provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a direct link addressing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an AP MLD, legacy STA, and non-AP MLD2 participating in communication provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of an AP MLD, non-AP MLD1 and non-AP MLD2 participating in communication provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a non-AP MLD1 and a non-AP MLD2 participating in communication provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of a Wakeup Schedule element provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of another Multi-link element provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of a frame body provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of a TDLS Link Info element provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 15 is a schematic flowchart of another direct link addressing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of another direct link addressing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of another direct link addressing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a direct link addressing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of another direct link addressing device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a multi-link device (multipe link device, MLD) includes one or more subordinate sites, and subordinate sites are logical sites, and "multi-link device includes subordinate sites” is also briefly described in the embodiment of this application as “multiple sites”.
  • Link equipment includes stations".
  • the affiliated station can be an AP or a non-access point station (non-AP STA).
  • non-AP STA non-access point station
  • this application refers to a multi-link device whose affiliated site is an AP as an AP MLD, or a multi-link AP, or a multi-link AP device, or an access point AP.
  • a single-link device whose affiliated site is an AP is called an AP device, or an access point, or an AP, or a single-link AP device, etc., or an access point AP.
  • a multi-link device whose affiliated site is a non-AP STA is called a non-AP MLD, or a multi-link STA, or a multi-link STA device, or a STA MLD, etc.
  • a single-link device whose affiliated site is a non-AP STA is called a STA device, or site, or STA, or non-AP STA, etc.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, a system using the IEEE 802.11 standard.
  • the IEEE 802.11 standard includes, but is not limited to, the 802.11be standard, or the next-generation 802.11 standard.
  • the applicable scenarios of the technical solution of this application include: communication between non-AP MLD and AP MLD, communication between STA device and AP MLD, communication between non-AP MLD and non-AP MLD, communication between STA device and non-AP MLD - Communication between AP MLDs.
  • Multi-link devices MLD can follow the IEEE 802.11 series of standards to achieve wireless communication, for example, follow extremely high throughput (EHT), or follow 802.11be-based or compatible support 802.11be, so as to achieve communication with other devices, of course Other devices may or may not be multi-link devices.
  • EHT extremely high throughput
  • 802.11be-based or compatible support 802.11be so as to achieve communication with other devices, of course
  • Other devices may or may not be multi-link devices.
  • the network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the evolution of the architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system to which the direct link addressing method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • the communication system includes at least one AP MLD and at least one non-AP MLD, such as non-AP MLD1 and non-AP MLD2.
  • the communication system may further include at least one STA device.
  • the AP MLD may include multiple APs
  • the non-AP MLD may include multiple STAs
  • the STA device includes one STA, which may be called a legacy STA.
  • the above AP MLD is a device deployed in a wireless communication network to provide wireless communication functions to its associated STA.
  • the AP MLD includes but is not limited to: access points (APs) in wireless fidelity (WiFi) systems, such as home gateways, routers, servers, switches, bridges, etc., evolved Node B (evolved Node B (eNB), Radio Network Controller (RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), Base Station Controller (BSC), Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Home Base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission and reception point, TRP or transmission point, TP) etc., it can also be 5G, such as a gNB in a new radio (NR) system, or a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group (including multiple antenna panels) antennas of a base station in a 5G system The panel
  • the above-mentioned non-AP MLD or STA device is a terminal that is connected to the above-mentioned communication system and has a wireless transceiver function, or a chip or chip system that can be provided in the terminal.
  • the terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment, access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user equipment.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation security ( Wireless terminals in transportation safety), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, vehicle-mounted terminals, RSUs with terminal functions, etc.
  • the terminal device of the present application may also be an on-board module, on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip or on-board unit built into the vehicle as one or more components or units.
  • the on-board component, on-board chip or on-board unit may implement the direct link addressing method provided in this application.
  • FIG. 1 is a simplified schematic diagram exemplified for ease of understanding, and other devices may also be included in the communication system, which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the frequency bands in which the multi-link device operates may include, but are not limited to: sub-1 GHz (sub 1 GHz), 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz, and high frequency 60 GHz.
  • MLD can communicate over multiple channels on the same frequency band.
  • the multiple frequency bands or multiple channels may be collectively referred to as multiple links. Through multi-link communication, the peak throughput is increased, the delay of service transmission is reduced, and the communication rate between MLDs is improved.
  • FIG 2 shows a schematic structural diagram of the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD participating in the communication.
  • the AP MLD includes subordinate AP1 and AP2.
  • AP1 and AP2 are independent of each other in a low (low) media access control (media access control, MAC) layer and a physical layer (physical layer, PHY), and share a high MAC (high MAC) layer.
  • the non-AP MLD includes subordinate STA1 and STA2.
  • STA1 and STA2 are independent of each other in the low MAC layer and PHY layer, and share the high MAC layer.
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD can communicate through link 1 and link 2.
  • link 1 One end of link 1 is connected to AP1 of AP MLD, the other end is connected to STA1 of non-AP MLD, and one end of link 2 is connected to AP MLD AP2, the other end is connected to STA2 of the non-AP MLD.
  • the multi-link device corresponds to the multi-link device address, and each link of the multi-link device corresponds to its own link address.
  • the multi-link device address can be the AP MLD MAC address (address).
  • the multi-link device address can be the STA MLD MAC address.
  • the link address between the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD may include the affiliated AP MAC address (affiliated AP MAC address) and the affiliated STA MAC address (affiliated STA MAC address) corresponding to both ends of the link.
  • FIG. 2 only shows that the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD work on two links, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of the links on which the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD work.
  • a multi-link device is a device with a wireless communication function, and the device can be an entire device, or a chip or a processing system installed in the entire device, and a device that installs these chips or processing systems.
  • the methods and functions of the embodiments of the present application may be implemented under the control of these chips or processing systems.
  • the non-AP MLD can establish a multi-link operation through one of the links to realize the simultaneous establishment of association with multiple links of the AP MLD.
  • the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD can exchange association request/response (Association Request/Response) frames on one link.
  • the link used to exchange Association Request/Response frames can be called a transmission link (transmission link), and the other links are non-transmitted links (Non-transmitted Link).
  • the Association Request/Response may carry the information of multiple links that need to be associated to realize the simultaneous association of multiple links between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the non-AP MLD sends an Association Request frame on link 1, and the Association Request frame carries the STA side information of link 1 and the STA side information of link 2.
  • link 1 may be referred to as a transmission link and link 2 may be referred to as a non-transmission link.
  • the AP MLD sends an Association Response frame to the non-AP MLD on Link 1.
  • the Association Response frame can carry the AP side information of Link 1 and the AP side information of Link 2.
  • the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD are associated on link 1 and link 2.
  • non-AP MLD and AP MLD can perform data transmission on Link 1 and Link 2.
  • the protocol defines a Multi-link element.
  • the information carried by the Multi-link element is mainly divided into two parts, one part is the multi-link device level information (MLD-level info), including the Multi-link Control field, the MLD MAC Address and other fields, and the other part is the information of each station (Per-STA Profile), which carries the relevant information of the non-transmission link.
  • the Link ID (Link ID) of the corresponding link will be indicated in the Per-STA Profile, and the link ID can be used to indicate which link the Per-STA profile corresponds to the information of the relevant STA on the link.
  • the MLD MAC Address field carries the MLD MAC Address of the sender.
  • Multi-link element adopts an inheritance structure.
  • the content of the corresponding element in the non-transmission link is the same as that of the corresponding element in the transmission link, then the corresponding element in the non-transmission link does not need to be carried in the Per-STA Profile of the link. Only when the content of the corresponding element is different, it will be carried in the Per-STA Profile of the link.
  • the specific format of the multi-link element is not limited to that shown in FIG. 3 , and the present application does not limit the specific format of the link identification element.
  • the non-AP MLD can obtain link information (such as a link identifier) corresponding to each link by receiving a probe response frame or a beacon frame, and can also obtain the working channel of each link and each link.
  • the address of the link such as the basic service set identifier (BSSID) of the link.
  • FIG. 4 is a frame of a Link Identifier element provided by this embodiment of the application. Schematic diagram of the structure.
  • first STA device and the second STA device are both connected to the same AP device, the first STA device includes one STA, and the second STA device includes one STA. If the first STA device and the second STA device are within the reachable range of wireless communication, a direct link can be established between the first STA device and the second STA device, so that the first STA device and the second STA device can pass the The direct link communicates directly without forwarding through the AP device, which can improve the data transmission rate and reduce the delay.
  • TDLS-related operations include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following: TDLS discovery, TDLS establishment, TDLS teardown, TDLS channel switching, TDLS energy saving, and TDLS service indication.
  • TDLS frames corresponding to TDLS related operations are shown in Table 1 below.
  • the TDLS frame may include: a TDLS action frame and a TDLS public action frame (public action frame).
  • the TDLS discovery response frame (TDLS Discovery Response frame) belongs to the TDLS public action frame
  • the TDLS frames other than the TDLS Discovery Response frame belong to the TDLS action frame.
  • the first STA device and the second STA device may implement corresponding TDLS related operations by exchanging TDLS frames.
  • the first STA device and the second STA device can exchange the TDLS peer power saving management request frame (TDLS Peer Power Saving Management Request frame, TDLS Peer PSM Request frame) and the TDLS peer power saving management response frame (TDLS Peer PSM Response frame) ) to achieve TDLS energy saving.
  • the first STA device or the second STA device may use the TDLS frame to implement corresponding TDLS related operations.
  • the first STA device may use a TDLS teardown frame (TDLS Teardown frame) to implement TDLS teardown.
  • TDLS Teardown frame TDLS teardown frame
  • the transmission mode of the TDLS frame may include: forwarding through an AP device (via AP), or direct transmission.
  • forwarding through the AP means that the TDLS frame using this transmission mode needs to forward the data between the first STA device and the second STA device through the AP.
  • Direct transmission means that the TDLS frame in this transmission mode can be transmitted from one STA device to another STA device through the direct link between the STA device and the STA device, and does not need to be forwarded by the AP device. It should be understood that some or a certain TDLS frame may be transmitted in one or both of the above-mentioned ways. For details, see Table 1 below, which will not be described one by one here.
  • TDLS frame When a TDLS frame is forwarded by an AP device or sent through a direct link, it will be encapsulated into a data frame or a management frame for transmission.
  • the TDLS action frame may be encapsulated into a data frame for transmission, and the TDLS public action frame may be directly transmitted in the form of a management frame.
  • Table 1 below, which will not be described one by one here.
  • the AAD may include one or more of the following fields: Frame Control, Address 1, Address 2, Address 3, Address 3, Sequence Control, and Address 4 (Address4), and quality of service control (Quality of Service Control, QoS Control).
  • address 1 is used to indicate the receiving address (receiver address, RA)
  • address 2 is used to indicate the transmitting address (transmitter address, TA)
  • address 3 is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD associated with the receiving end, or the address associated with the receiving end
  • the address of the associated AP (referring to the AP in the AP MLD).
  • address 3 can be used for frame filtering. For example, according to address 3, it can be known whether the frame belongs to the basic service set (BSS), if not, the frame will be discarded.
  • BSS basic service set
  • the specific format of the AAD is not limited to that shown in FIG. 5 , for example, address 4 in the AAD may be optional, and the present application does not limit the specific format of the AAD.
  • the MPDU may include one or more of the following fields: Frame Control, Duration, Address 1, Address 2, Address 3, Sequence Control, Address 4, Quality of Service Control, High Throughput Control control, HT Control), cipher-block chaining message authentication code protocol header (cipher-block chaining message authentication code protocol header, CCMP Header), frame body (Frame Body), message integrity check (message intergrity code, MIC), and frame check sequence (FCS).
  • address 1 is used to indicate the receiving address
  • address 2 is used to indicate the sending address
  • address 3 is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD associated with the receiving end, or the address of the AP associated with the receiving end (referring to the AP in the AP MLD). address, or the address of the AP (referring to the AP in the AP MLD) associated with the link between the sender and the receiver.
  • the MPDU header may include: frame control, duration, address 1, address 2, address 3, sequence control, address 4, quality of service control, and high throughput control.
  • the sender will calculate the MIC according to the AAD and MPDU frame body, and place it after the frame body, and then encrypt the MPDU frame body and MIC for transmission.
  • the receiving end After receiving the MPDU, the receiving end performs MIC verification, calculates a MIC, and then compares whether the calculated MIC is the same as the received MIC, so as to know whether the MPDU has been tampered with.
  • the specific format of the MPDU is not limited to that shown in FIG. 6 , for example, the address 4 in the MPDU may be optional, and this application does not limit the specific format of the MPDU.
  • the address settings of the data frame and management frame between the legacy STA and the AP device are described below in conjunction with Table 2 and Table 3.
  • the AP device may include a slave AP.
  • the address 1, address 2, address 3 and address 4 in the MPDU header are consistent with the address 1, address 2, address 3 and address 4 in the AAD.
  • the specific settings are shown in Table 2 and Table 3.
  • address 1, address 2, address 3 and address 4 in the MPDU header of the data frame, and address 1, address 2, address 3 and address 4 in the AAD are shown in Table 2.
  • P2P point-to-point
  • the STA communicates with the STA.
  • DA refers to a destination address (DA)
  • SA refers to a source address (SA)
  • BSSID refers to the address of the AP to which the AP device belongs.
  • the settings of address 3 and address 4 are divided into two examples: MAC layer service data unit and short aggregate MAC layer service data unit case (MAC service data unit and short aggregate MAC service data unit case, MSDU and Short A-MSDU case), Basic A-MSDU and Dynamic A-MSDU case (Basic A-MSDU and Dynamic A-MSDU case).
  • Address 1, Address 2, and Address 3 in the MPDU header of the management frame, and Address 1, Address 2, and Address 3 in the AAD are shown in Table 3.
  • the STA MAC Address is the address of the legacy STA
  • the BSSID indicates the address of the AP to which the AP device belongs.
  • a Non-AP MLD may include multiple affiliated STAs, and an AP MLD may include multiple affiliated APs.
  • address 1 and address 2 are respectively set as the corresponding device addresses.
  • address 3 is set as the destination address; for downstream data, address 3 is set as the source address.
  • address 3 is set to the address of the AP MLD.
  • management frames can be divided into link-level (link-level) management frames and device-level (MLD-level) management frames.
  • the Link-level management frame refers to that the management frame is for a specific link, such as a channel switching request/response frame.
  • MLD-level management frames are for the entire multi-link device, such as Add block ACK (Add block ACK, ADDBA) frames.
  • the setting rules for address 1, address 2, and address 3 in the AAD of the above management frame and the setting rules for address 1, address 2, and address 3 in the MPDU header during air interface transmission are as follows: For address 1 and address 2, When constructing AAD, address 1 and address 2 are set as the addresses of the corresponding MLD; during air interface transmission, address 1 and address 2 in the MPDU Header will be replaced with the corresponding link address. For address 3, when the management frame is a link-level management frame, A3 in AAD is set as the affiliated AP address corresponding to the destination link; during air interface transmission, A3 in the MPDU header is the same as A3 in AAD. For MLD-level management frames, A3 in AAD is set as the address of AP MLD; during air interface transmission, A3 in MPDU Header is the same as A3 in AAD.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a method for addressing a direct link according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the description is made by taking the first device as the TDLS initiator as an example.
  • the direct link addressing method can be applied to the communication between the STA device shown in FIG. 1 and the non-AP MLD2, or between the non-AP MLD1 and the non-AP MLD2.
  • the direct link addressing method includes the following steps:
  • the first device determines the protected data.
  • the first device may include one or more station STAs, the first device is connected to a third device, and the third device may include multiple APs.
  • the first device may be the STA device shown in FIG. 1
  • the STA device may be called a legacy (legacy) STA.
  • the legacy STA is used as the legacy STA in the following embodiments of this application. example to illustrate.
  • the first device may be the non-AP MLD1 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the third device may be the AP MLD shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the protected data may include a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the protected data may be the AAD shown in FIG. 5
  • the first address may be the address 1 in the AAD
  • the second address may be the address 2 in the AAD
  • the third address may be the address 3 in the AAD.
  • the first address is the address of the second device
  • the second address is the address of the first device
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the first address is the address of the first device.
  • the device is connected to the first AP of the third device.
  • the second device is connected to the third device, the second device may include multiple STAs, and the second device may be the non-AP MLD2 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the first device is legacy STA
  • the second device is non-AP MLD2
  • the third device is AP MLD.
  • AP MLD includes AP1, AP2, and AP3
  • legacy STA is connected to AP1 of AP MLD
  • STA1 and STA2 of non-AP MLD2 are connected to AP1 and AP2 of AP MLD, respectively, as shown in Table 6,
  • the first address is the address of non-AP MLD2, such as non-AP MLD2 MAC Address
  • the second address is the address of legacy STA, such as legacy STA MAC Address
  • the third address is the address of AP1, such as the BSSID of AP1.
  • the first address is the address of the second device
  • the second address is the address of the first device
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the first device is non-AP MLD1
  • the second device is non-AP MLD2
  • the third device is AP MLD.
  • AP MLD includes AP1, AP2, and AP3, STA1 and STA2 of non-AP MLD1 are respectively connected to AP1 and AP3 of AP MLD
  • STA1 and STA2 of non-AP MLD2 are respectively connected to AP1 and AP2 of AP MLD connection
  • the first address is the address of non-AP MLD2, such as non-AP MLD2 MAC Address
  • the second address is the address of non-AP MLD1, such as non-AP MLD1 MAC Address
  • the third The address is the address of the AP MLD, such as AP MLD MAC Address.
  • FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 are only examples provided by the embodiments of the present application, and do not limit the number of STAs included in the non-AP MLD2 and the number of APs included in the AP MLD, and do not limit the difference between the non-AP MLD2 and the AP MLD. connection, and how the legacy STA and AP MLD connect.
  • the first device sends the first data unit. Accordingly, the second device receives the first data unit from the first device.
  • the first data unit may include a first header, the first header is determined according to the protected data, and the first data unit is transmitted through a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit may be the MPDU shown in FIG. 6
  • the first header may be the MPDU header shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the first data unit can be transmitted through the link 1 between the first device and the second device, and does not need to be forwarded through the second device, thereby reducing the transmission delay.
  • the first data unit may be determined, and specifically, one or more of the following manners 1 to 4 may be adopted.
  • the first device determines the first header of the first data unit.
  • the first header may include a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the first header may be the MPDU header shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the fourth address may be address 1 in the MPDU header
  • the fifth address may be address 2 in the MPDU header
  • the sixth address may be address 3 in the MPDU header.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device.
  • the first device is legacy STA
  • the second device is non-AP MLD2
  • the third device is AP MLD.
  • the AP MLD includes AP1, AP2, and AP3
  • the legacy STA is connected to AP1 of the AP MLD
  • the STA1 and STA2 of the non-AP MLD2 are connected to AP1 and AP2 of the AP MLD, respectively.
  • the address settings in the first data unit are as shown in Table 8, the fourth address is the address of the non-AP MLD2, such as the non-AP MLD2 MAC Address, the fifth address It is the address of legacy STA, such as legacy STA MAC Address, and the sixth address is the address of AP1, such as the BSSID of AP1.
  • the fourth, fifth and sixth addresses of the first header may be the same as the first, second and third addresses of the protected data, respectively.
  • the fourth address is the address of the STA corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the second device
  • the fifth address is the multiple STAs of the first device.
  • the sixth address is the address of the AP corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the first direct link is the first device A direct link to the second device.
  • the first device is non-AP MLD1
  • the second device is non-AP MLD2
  • the third device is AP MLD.
  • a link 1-1 and a link 3 are established between the first device and the third device
  • a link 1-2 and a link 2 are established between the second device and the third device.
  • STA1 of non-AP MLD1 is connected to STA1 of non-AP MLD2, corresponding to direct link 1.
  • the address in the first data unit is set as follows As shown in Table 9, the fourth address is the address of STA1 of non-AP MLD2, such as affiliated STA 1 MAC Address of non-AP MLD 2; the fifth address is the address of STA1 of non-AP MLD1, such as affiliated STA 1 MAC Address of non-AP MLD 1; the sixth address is the address of AP1 corresponding to link 1, such as affiliated AP1 BSSID of AP MLD, or affiliated AP1 MAC address of AP MLD.
  • the first direct link may be the transmission of the first link in the direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • Direct link to data unit may be the transmission of the first link in the direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first device determines the first element of the first data unit.
  • the first data unit may include a TDLS frame, and the TDLS frame includes the first element.
  • the first element may be used to indicate an identification (ID) of the target link or an address of an AP corresponding to the target link among the plurality of APs of the third device.
  • the first element may be set as the BSSID corresponding to the target link.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS channel switching request frame or a TDLS channel switching response frame.
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the target link among the multiple APs of the third device is the address of AP2 of the third device, that is, the affiliated of AP MLD AP2 BSSID.
  • the target link is a second direct link applied by the TDLS frame, and the second direct link is a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the TDLS frame is a TDLS channel switching request frame and a TDLS channel switching response frame, and the target chain corresponding to the TDLS channel switching request/response frame If the channel is the direct link 2, the direct link 2 can be switched from the current channel to the designated channel according to the first element corresponding to the TDLS channel switching request/response frame.
  • the TDLS Channel Switch Request/Response can be transmitted through any direct link. It does not have to be transmitted on the target link that you want to switch. Improve transfer flexibility.
  • the first element may be the link identifier element (Link Identifier element) shown in FIG. 4, or a newly defined element.
  • the first field in the first element may be used to indicate the identifier of the target link or the address of the AP corresponding to the target link among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the first field may be the BSSID field of the Link Identifier element.
  • Mode 3 the first device determines the second element of the first data unit.
  • the first data unit may include a TDLS frame
  • the TDLS frame may include a wake-up scheduling element and a second element.
  • the offset field in the wake-up scheduling element is the offset relative to the first timing synchronization function threshold of the third direct link
  • the second element is used to indicate the identity of the third direct link or the multiplicity of the third device.
  • Direct link 1 corresponds to AP1
  • direct link 2 corresponds to AP2.
  • the offset field in the scheduling element is the offset relative to the first timing synchronization function threshold of the direct link 2
  • the second element is used to indicate the identity of the direct link 2 or the address of the AP2 of the third device , such as affiliated AP2 BSSID of AP MLD.
  • Different affiliated APs of the AP MLD may have independent timing synchronization functions (TSFs).
  • TSFs timing synchronization functions
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS peer energy saving management request frame and a TDLS peer energy saving management response frame.
  • the TDLS initiator and the responder exchange the TDLS peer energy saving management request frame and the TDLS peer energy saving management response frame, they can wake up according to the TDLS peer energy saving management request frame and/or the TDLS peer energy saving management response frame.
  • the scheduling element periodically wakes up and sends and receives data, thereby saving power.
  • the TDLS Peer PSM Request/Response can be transmitted through any direct link, and the end can correctly parse the wake-up scheduling element , which can improve transmission flexibility.
  • the second element may be the link identifier element (Link Identifier element) shown in FIG. 4, or a newly defined element.
  • the first field in the second element may be used to indicate the identifier of the third direct link or the address of the AP corresponding to the third direct link among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the first field may be the BSSID field of the Link Identifier element.
  • the wake-up schedule element may reuse an existing wake-up schedule element, or be a newly defined element.
  • the Wakeup Schedule element may include one or more of the following fields: Element ID, Length, Offset, Interval, Awake window Slots ), Maximum Awake Window Duration, and Idle Count.
  • the offset field may be used to indicate the offset of the first wake-up window relative to TSF0, and the TSF may be a counter, and the value stored in the counter represents the time value.
  • the interval field can be used to indicate the time interval between two adjacent wake-up windows.
  • the wakeup window slot field is used to indicate the duration of the wakeup window.
  • the Maximum Wakeup Window Duration field is used to indicate the maximum duration of the wakeup window.
  • the idle number field is used to indicate the number of idle wake-up windows that the TDLS peer end is allowed to experience before deleting the periodic wake-up schedule.
  • the idle wake-up window means that no unicast frame from the TDLS peer end is received during the wake-up window. For example, if the first device has not received a unicast frame from the second device during the process of experiencing the number of wake-up windows indicated by the idle number field, the second device may delete the wake-up scheduling element.
  • Mode 2 and Mode 3 can be used independently or in combination.
  • the first element and the second element can be the same element, such as the first element, so that the first element can be used to indicate the target link
  • the identifier of the third device or the address of the AP corresponding to the target link in the multiple APs of the third device and can be used to indicate the identifier of the third direct link or the multiple APs of the third device corresponding to the third direct link address of the AP. That is, the target link and the third direct link are the same direct link.
  • the link identification element, or the setting manner of a newly defined element will be described below in conjunction with Table 10 for different TDLS frames. That is to say, when the TDLS frame is a different frame, the link identification element, or a newly defined element, or the BSSID field in the link identification element, or the first field of the newly defined element may correspond to different settings content.
  • the link identification element, the newly defined element, the first element, and the second element are collectively referred to as the first element below.
  • the first element when the first device includes one STA and the TDLS frame is a TDLS discovery request frame, the first element is used to indicate the identifier of the transmission link, or the identification of the transmission link in the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the address of the AP, and the transmission link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame.
  • the first element may be set as the BSSID corresponding to the transmission link.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identifier of the transmission link or the address of the AP corresponding to the transmission link in the multiple APs of the third device, and the transmission The link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame.
  • the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery response frame in the TDLS frame may be the same as the setting content of the first element corresponding to the TDLS discovery request frame in the TDLS frame.
  • the first element may be set to the BSSID corresponding to the transmission link of the TDLS discovery request frame.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the link between the first device and the third device, or the link between the multiple APs of the third device and the first device.
  • the address of the AP corresponding to a device, and the transmission link is the link that sends the TDLS discovery request frame.
  • the first element may be set to the BSSID corresponding to the link where the Legacy STA is located.
  • the TDLS frames are TDLS setup response frames, TDLS setup confirmation frames, TDLS teardown frames, TDLS channel switching request frames, TDLS channel switching response frames, TDLS peer-end energy-saving management request frames, and TDLS peer-end energy-saving management frames.
  • a response frame a TDLS peer traffic indication frame or a TDLS peer traffic response frame
  • the specific implementation of the first element can refer to the implementation of the first element when the first device includes a STA and the TDLS frame is a TDLS establishment request frame. method, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identifier of the reference link, or the reference link in the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the reference link may be the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element.
  • the first element may be set as the BSSID corresponding to the reference link.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identity of the public link that transmits the TDLS discovery response frame, or the identity of the multiple APs of the third device that transmits the TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the common link is the link between the first device and the third device, the common link of the link between the second device and the third device, and the third device associated with the STA of the first device corresponding to the common link.
  • the AP of the device is the same as the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the second device corresponding to the public link.
  • the TDLS discovery response frame may be transmitted on any public link.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identifier of the reference link or among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the reference link For example, the first element may be set as the BSSID corresponding to the reference link.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device, which may indicate tearing down all direct links between the first device and the second device.
  • the first element may be set to the MAC address of the AP MLD.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the AP corresponding to the direct link between the first device and the second device among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the BSSID corresponding to a direct link.
  • the first element when the first element is set to the address of the affiliated AP corresponding to a direct link between the first device and the second device, it means that the direct link is removed, that is, the direct link cannot be passed through subsequently. send and receive data.
  • the specific implementation of the first element may refer to the above-mentioned Mode 2, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first element may be set as the BSSID corresponding to the target link.
  • the specific implementation of the first element may refer to the above-mentioned way 3, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first element may be set to the BSSID of the third direct link corresponding to the wake-up scheduling element.
  • the first element is used to indicate the address of the third device.
  • the first element may be set to the MAC address of the AP MLD.
  • the reference link, transmission link, and common link are described in detail below.
  • the reference link When the frame body of the MPDU carries the Multi-link element, the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element is called the reference link.
  • the specific format of MPDU can refer to Figure 6, the specific format of Multi-link element can refer to Figure 3 or Figure 12, and the specific format of Link Identifier Element can refer to Figure 4.
  • the Multi-link element in the following TDLS action frames, such as TDLS Setup Request/Response, TDLS Discovery Request/Response.
  • TDLS setup Request/Response TDLS Discovery Request/Response
  • the non-AP MLD will know whether the peer is an MLD. If both the TDLS initiator and the responder are MLD, the Multi-link element can be carried in the subsequent TDLS Setup Request/Response frame.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of another Multi-link element provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the Type subfield is set to the number corresponding to TDLS.
  • the Transparent/non-transparent bit indicates the address mode used by the non-AP MLD.
  • the address mode is Transparent, it means that the link address of the non-AP MLD is the same as the non-AP MLD address; when the address mode is non-transparent, it means that different links corresponding to the non-AP MLD use different link addresses.
  • the non-APMLD address is different from the link address of the non-AP MLD.
  • the MLD MAC Address field is always set to the MAC address of the AP MLD.
  • the specific format of the frame body can be referred to as shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the frame body may include reference link information (such as Element ID#1, Element ID#2, etc.) and other link information (Multi-link element).
  • reference link information such as Element ID#1, Element ID#2, etc.
  • Multi-link element For example, in conjunction with Figure 3 or Figure 12, other link information can be carried in the Per-STA Profile in the Multi-link element.
  • Transmitting Link It refers to the link on which the frame is sent, and the corresponding link is called the transmission link. Assuming that a TDLS frame is sent on link 1, link 1 is called the transport link.
  • the transmission link is the reference link.
  • the transmission link and the reference link be consistent. For example, if the initiator sends a multi-link association request frame on link 1, the responder also needs to return a multi-link association response frame on link 1.
  • the transmission link may not be the same as the reference link.
  • the transmission link when sending a data frame, the transmission link may be any link, that is, the data frame may be sent on any link, so that the transmission link and the reference link may be the same or different.
  • the manner of sending the data frame may include: one possibility is that the data frame is sent according to the management frame sending requirement, that is, the data frame is sent on which link, and the data frame is sent back on which link. At the same time, the Transmitting link and the reference link are consistent. Another possibility is to send on any link according to the sending requirements of the data frame. For example, TDLS Setup Request is sent on link 1, and TDLS Setup Response is returned on link 2. At this time, the Transmitting link and the reference link are not required to be consistent.
  • a direct link corresponding to two STAs associated with the same AP can be called a common link.
  • STA refers to a legacy STA or a subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD
  • the link associated with the legacy STA is the public link.
  • non-AP MLD1, non-AP MLD2) scenarios there may be multiple common links.
  • AP MLD corresponds to link 1
  • link 2 and link 3 link 1 and link 2 are established between non-AP MLD1 and AP MLD
  • link 1 and link 2 are established between non-AP MLD2 and AP MLD Way 1 and Link 3.
  • STA1 of non-AP MLD1 and STA1 of non-AP MLD2 are both associated with AP1 of AP MLD, corresponding to link 1.
  • STA2 of non-AP MLD1 is associated with AP2 of AP MLD, corresponding to link 2.
  • STA3 of non-AP MLD2 is associated with AP3 of AP MLD, corresponding to link 3.
  • Direct link 1 and direct link 2 are established, and STA1 of non-AP MLD1 and STA1 of non-AP MLD2 are directly connected to link 1, and STA2 of non-AP MLD1 is directly connected to STA3 of non-AP MLD2 Link 2, the directly connected link 1 can be called a public link.
  • the first device determines the third element of the first data unit.
  • the first data unit may include a third element, and the third element may be used to indicate that at least one fourth direct link is established on the first link.
  • the first link is a common link of the link between the first device and the third device and the link between the second device and the third device, and the first link may include at least one fourth direct link.
  • the first link may be a public link between the first device and the third device, the second device and the third device, and the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the first device corresponding to the first link
  • the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the second device corresponding to the first link is the same. In this way, the first device and the second device can establish a direct link on the public link, so as to increase the data transmission rate.
  • the third element may include a direct link number field and a direct link identifier field.
  • the number of direct links field may be used to indicate the number of fourth direct links to be established. In this way, by instructing the number of established fourth direct links, the fourth direct link can be established on part or all of the links of the first link, and the flexibility of establishing the direct link can be improved.
  • the direct link identifier field may include the address of at least one AP corresponding to at least one fourth direct link respectively among the multiple APs of the third device, or the identifier of at least one fourth direct link.
  • the direct link identifier field may include the BSSID of at least one AP corresponding to at least one fourth direct link, or the link of at least one fourth direct link, among the multiple APs of the third device. ID. In this way, it is possible to indicate on which links the direct link is to be established.
  • the MAC address of the AP may express the same meaning unless the difference is emphasized.
  • the direct link identifier field may include the address of the first STA of the first device and the address of the second STA of the second device. That is, the directly connected link identifier field may include addresses of subordinate STAs at both ends of the directly connected link, such as the MAC address of the first STA and the MAC address of the second STA.
  • the direct link identifier field may include the address of at least one AP, or at least one fourth direct link, respectively corresponding to at least one fourth direct link among multiple APs of the third device , and the address of the first STA of the first device and the address of the second STA of the second device.
  • the above-mentioned third element in Mode 4 is described in the scenario of establishing a direct link on a public link.
  • a non-public link may be used between the first device and the second device. establish a direct link.
  • the implementation manner of the third element is similar to the specific implementation manner of the third element corresponding to the scenario of establishing the direct link on the public link.
  • the third element may be used to indicate that at least one fifth direct link is established on the second link.
  • the second link is a different link between the first device and the third device and the link between the second device and the third device, and the second link may include at least one fifth direct link road.
  • the second link may be a non-public link between the first device and the third device, or between the second device and the third device, and the second link corresponds to the link of the third device associated with the STA of the first device.
  • the AP is different from the AP of the third device associated with the STA of the second device corresponding to the second link. In this way, the first device and the second device can establish a direct link on the non-public link, so as to improve the data transmission rate.
  • the third element may include a direct link number field and a direct link identifier field.
  • the number of direct links field may be used to indicate the number of fifth direct links requested to be established. In this way, by instructing the number of the fifth direct link to be established, the fifth direct link can be established on part or all of the links of the second link, and the flexibility of establishing the direct link can be improved.
  • the direct link identifier field may include the address of at least one AP corresponding to at least one fifth direct link respectively among the multiple APs of the third device, or the identifier of at least one fifth direct link.
  • one end of the fifth direct link corresponds to the STA of the first device
  • the other end corresponds to the STA of the second device
  • the direct link identifier field may include the STA of the first device among multiple APs of the third device and the STA of the first device.
  • the address of the corresponding AP, or the address of the AP corresponding to the STA of the second device among multiple APs of the third device.
  • the directly connected link identifier field may include the BSSID of the affiliated AP corresponding to either end of the two ends of the fifth directly connected link or the identifier of the corresponding second link of the affiliated AP.
  • the address of the subordinate AP corresponding to the initiator of the establishment of the direct link or the identifier of the second link corresponding to the subordinate AP may be used to represent the indirect link.
  • the direct link identifier field may include the address of the AP corresponding to the STA of the first device among the multiple APs of the third device, or the address corresponding to the affiliated AP. The identifier of the second link.
  • the third element may be a TDLS Link Info element.
  • the TDLS link information element may include one or more of the following fields: Element ID, Length, Number of Direct links, and Direct link Identifier.
  • FIG. 14 is only an example of the present application.
  • the seventh address is bound to the TPK.
  • the seventh address includes the address of the AP corresponding to the direct link between the first device and the second device among the multiple APs of the third device, or the addresses of all APs of the third device, and the third device. the address of.
  • the address of the subordinate AP corresponding to the direct link (such as the BSSID of the subordinate AP) and the address of the third device can be bound to the TPK, or, the addresses of all subordinate APs of the third device (such as all subordinate APs) BSSID) and the address of the third device are bound to the TPK.
  • the first device and the second device may negotiate to establish a direct link on some or all of the links, so that the established direct link corresponds to the affiliated AP.
  • the address of the third device and the address of the third device are bound to the TPK, or the addresses of all APs belonging to the third device and the addresses of the third device are bound to the TPK, and the first device and the second device can be connected through a direct link. Security of communications.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the embodiments of the present application may further include the TPK derivation process shown in the following steps 1 to 2. It should be noted that steps 1 to 2 may be used alone, or used in combination with the method, mode 1, mode 2, mode 3 and/or mode 3 shown in FIG. 7 .
  • Step 1 the first device negotiates with the second device to determine an authentication and key management (authentication and key management, AKM) suite selector.
  • AKM authentication and key management
  • the AKM suite selector may include one or more of the following: organizationally unique identifier (OUI), suite type (suite type), authentication (authentication), key management (key management), key derivation, authentication numbers.
  • OPI organizationally unique identifier
  • uite type suite type
  • authentication authentication
  • key management key management
  • key derivation authentication numbers.
  • Table 11 The specific corresponding content of each item is shown in Table 11, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 2 the first device negotiates with the second device to derive the TDLS peer key TPK.
  • formula (1) and formula (2) can be used to determine the TPK.
  • TPK-Key-Input Hash(min(SNonce,ANonce)
  • Hash represents the hash algorithm
  • SNonce supply nonce
  • ANonce authentication nonce
  • represents splicing or inclusion
  • the mathematical symbol min represents taking The minimum value
  • the mathematical symbol max means taking the maximum value.
  • TPK KDF-Hash-Length(TPK-Key-Input,“TDLS MLD PMK”,min(MAC_I,MAC_R)
  • TPK represents the TDLS peer key
  • KDF-Hash-lenrth represents the key derivation function
  • TDLS MLD PMK represents the TDLS MLD pairwise master key (PMK)
  • the mathematical symbol min indicates the minimum value
  • the mathematical symbol max indicates the maximum value
  • AP MLD MAC Address indicates the address of the third device (AP MLD)
  • affiliated AP Address1 indicates the first device and the second device.
  • the address of the subordinate AP (the AP of the third device) corresponding to the direct link.
  • MAC_I represents the MAC address of the first device
  • MAC_R represents the MAC address of the second device.
  • steps 1 to 2 can also be applied to the derivation of a pairwise master key (PTK), and the seventh address can be bound to the PTK, which will not be described in detail here.
  • PTK pairwise master key
  • the first device and the second device can complete the TPK-derived handshake negotiation by exchanging TDLS Setup Request/Response/Confirm (see steps a to c below for details), and the above steps 1 to 2 can be combined It can be used in combination with the following steps a-c to complete the TPK-derived handshake negotiation.
  • Step a the first device sends a TDLS Setup Request frame to the second device. Accordingly, the second device receives the TDLS Setup Request frame from the first device.
  • Step b the second device sends a TDLS Setup Response frame to the first device. Accordingly, the first device receives the TDLS Setup Response frame from the second device.
  • the second device may send a TDLS Setup Response frame to the first device according to the Link Identifier element and/or the TDLS Link Info element.
  • the TDLS Setup Response frame may include accepting the TDLS setup request or not accepting the TDLS setup request, such as the status code (Status Code) of the TDLS Setup Response frame indicating acceptance or non-acceptance.
  • the status code Status Code
  • Step c if the TDLS Setup Response frame indicates Accept (Accept), the first device sends a TDLS Setup Confirm frame to the second device, thereby completing the TPK-derived handshake negotiation.
  • the protected data is constructed using the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the first AP connected to the first device.
  • the protected data is constructed by using the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the third device. Therefore, the first device can transmit the first data unit through the direct link between the first device and the second device, and the data transmission rate can be increased.
  • the device address is used to construct the protected data, and the change of the direct link does not affect the protected data. Re-encryption is required to further increase the data transfer rate.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of another direct link addressing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the description is made by taking the second device as the TDLS initiator as an example.
  • the direct link addressing method can be applied to the communication between the STA device shown in FIG. 1 and the non-AP MLD2, or between the non-AP MLD1 and the non-AP MLD2.
  • the second device determines the protected data.
  • the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the first address is the address of the first device
  • the second address is the address of the second device
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the first address is the address of the second device.
  • the device is connected to the first AP of the third device.
  • the first address, second address and third address of the protected data are shown in Table 12.
  • Table 6 in the above-mentioned S701 is that the setting contents of the first address and the second address are exchanged, and the responder is the first device, so that the first address is the address of the legacy STA, such as the legacy STA MAC Address; the initiator is the first device.
  • the third address is the same as the third address in Table 6 above, and the third address is the address of AP1, such as the BSSID of AP1.
  • the first address is the address of the first device
  • the second address is the address of the second device
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the first address, second address and third address of the protected data are shown in Table 13. Since the initiating end and the responding end are changed, the difference between Table 13 and Table 7 in the above S701 is that the setting contents of the first address and the second address are interchanged, see Table 13 for details, and will not be repeated here.
  • the second device sends the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header, the first header is determined according to the protected data, and the first data unit is transmitted through a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit may be the MPDU shown in FIG. 6
  • the first header may be the MPDU header shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the first data unit may be determined, and specifically, one or more of the following manners 5 to 8 may be adopted.
  • the second device determines the first header of the first data unit.
  • the first header may include a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the first header may be the MPDU header shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the fourth address may be address 1 in the MPDU header
  • the fifth address may be address 2 in the MPDU header
  • the sixth address may be address 3 in the MPDU header.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device.
  • the fourth address, fifth address and sixth address of the MPDU header are shown in Table 14. Due to the change of the initiator and the responder, the difference between Table 14 and Table 8 in the above method 1 is that the setting contents of the fourth address and the fifth address are interchanged, as shown in Table 14 for details, which will not be repeated here.
  • the fourth address is the address of the STA corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple STAs of the first device
  • the fifth address is multiple STAs of the second device.
  • the sixth address is the address of the AP corresponding to the first direct link among the multiple APs of the third device
  • the first direct link is the first device A direct link to the second device.
  • the fourth address, fifth address and sixth address of the MPDU header are shown in Table 15. Due to the change of the initiator and the responder, the difference between Table 15 and Table 9 in the above method 1 is that the setting contents of the fourth address and the fifth address are interchanged, as shown in Table 15 for details, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first direct link may be the transmission of the first link in the direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • Direct link to data unit may be the transmission of the first link in the direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the second device determines the first element of the first data unit.
  • the first data unit may comprise a TDLS frame, the TDLS frame comprising the first element.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identifier of the target link or the address of the AP corresponding to the target link among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the first element may be set as the BSSID corresponding to the target link.
  • the target link is a second direct link applied by the TDLS frame, and the second direct link is a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the second device determines the second element of the first data unit.
  • the first data unit may include a TDLS frame
  • the TDLS frame may include a wake-up schedule element and a second element.
  • the offset field in the wake-up scheduling element is the offset relative to the first timing synchronization function threshold of the third direct-connected link
  • the second element can be used to indicate the identity of the third direct-connected link or the multiplicity of the third device.
  • Manner 6 and Manner 7 may be used independently or in combination, and details are not described herein again.
  • the link identification element or the setting manner of a newly defined element for different TDLS frames in conjunction with the above Table 16. That is to say, when the TDLS frame is a different frame, the link identification element, or a newly defined element, or the BSSID field in the link identification element, or the first field of the newly defined element may correspond to different settings content.
  • the link identification element, the newly defined element, the first element, and the second element are collectively referred to as the first element below.
  • the main difference between the first element setting method and when the first device acts as a TDLS initiator, the first element setting method is that the first device includes one STA, and the TDLS frame is the TDLS discovery request frame. in the scene.
  • the first element is used to indicate the identifier of the reference link, or the AP corresponding to the reference link among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the reference link may be the link indicated by the BSSID field in the Link Identifier Element.
  • the first element may be set as the BSSID corresponding to the reference link.
  • the second device determines the third element of the first data unit.
  • the first data unit may include a third element, and the third element may be used to indicate that at least one fourth direct link is established on the first link, and the first link is between the first device and the third device.
  • the link between the second device and the third device is a common link, and the first link includes at least one fourth direct link.
  • a direct link may be established on a non-public link between the first device and the second device.
  • the implementation manner of the third element is similar to the specific implementation manner of the third element corresponding to the scenario of establishing the direct link on the public link.
  • the third element may be used to indicate that at least one fifth direct link is established on the second link.
  • the second link is a different link between the first device and the third device and the link between the second device and the third device, and the second link may include at least one fifth direct link road.
  • the first device and the second device can establish a direct link on the non-public link, so as to improve the data transmission rate.
  • reference may be made to the corresponding implementation manner in the foregoing manner 4, which will not be repeated here.
  • the seventh address is bound to the TDLS peer key TPK.
  • the seventh address may include the address of the AP corresponding to the direct link between the first device and the second device among the multiple APs of the third device, or the addresses of all APs of the third device, and the third device the address of.
  • the first device to bind the seventh address to the TPK, which will not be repeated here.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the embodiment of the present application may further include the TPK derivation process shown in the following steps 3 to 4. It should be noted that, steps 3 to 4 may be used alone, or used in combination with the method, mode 5, mode 6, mode 7, and/or mode 8 shown in FIG. 15 .
  • Step 3 the first device negotiates with the second device to determine the authentication and AKM suite selector.
  • the first device negotiates with the second device to determine the authentication and AKM suite selector.
  • Step 4 the first device negotiates with the second device to derive the TDLS peer key TPK.
  • TPK TDLS peer key
  • steps 3 to 4 can also be applied to the derivation of a pairwise master key (PTK), and the seventh address can be bound to the PTK, which will not be described in detail here.
  • PTK pairwise master key
  • the first device and the second device can complete the TPK-derived handshake negotiation by exchanging TDLS Setup Request/Response/Confirm (see steps d-f below for details), and the above steps three to Four can be used in combination with the following steps d-f to complete the TPK-derived handshake negotiation.
  • Step d-step f is similar to the above-mentioned step a-step c, step d-step f corresponds to the above-mentioned step a-step c respectively, the main difference is that the first equipment in the above-mentioned steps a-step c is replaced by the second equipment, and the The second device is replaced with the first device, which will not be repeated here.
  • the protected data is constructed using the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the first AP connected to the first device.
  • the protected data is constructed by using the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the third device. Therefore, the first device can transmit the first data unit through the direct link between the first device and the second device, without forwarding by the third device, and the data transmission rate can be increased.
  • the device address is used to construct the protected data, and the change of the direct link does not affect the protected data. Re-encryption is required to further increase the data transfer rate.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of still another direct link addressing method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The description is made by taking the first device as the TDLS initiator as an example.
  • the direct link addressing method can be applied to the communication between the STA device shown in FIG. 1 and the non-AP MLD2, or between the non-AP MLD1 and the non-AP MLD2.
  • the first device determines a first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header
  • the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the first data unit may include a frame body, for example, the frame body may be a TDLS frame or data.
  • the first data unit may be the MPDU shown in FIG. 6
  • the first header may be the MPDU header shown in FIG. 6
  • the TDLS frame or data is carried in the Frame Body field.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the first The device is connected to the first AP of the third device.
  • the first AP is AP1 in Figure 8.
  • the fourth address, fifth address and sixth address of the MPDU header are shown in Table 17
  • the fourth address is the address of non-AP MLD2, such as non-AP MLD2 MAC Address
  • the fifth address is the address of legacy STA, such as legacy STA MAC Address
  • the sixth address is the address of AP1, such as the BSSID of AP1.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the same as the sixth address among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the direct link, and the sixth direct link is a link for transmitting the first data unit between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit is transmitted over a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the first device is non-AP MLD1
  • the second device is non-AP MLD2
  • the third device is AP MLD.
  • the fourth address, fifth address and sixth address of the MPDU header are as shown in Table 18, assuming that the first data is transmitted on the direct link 1 unit, the fourth address is the address of STA1 of non-AP MLD2, such as non-AP MLD2 MAC Address; the fifth address is the address of STA1 of non-AP MLD1, such as non-AP MLD1 MAC Address; the sixth address is the The address of the AP1 corresponding to the direct link 1, such as the affiliated AP1 BSSID of the AP MLD.
  • the setting methods of the sixth address corresponding to Table 17 and Table 18 are compatible with the situation that the first device includes one STA and the first device includes multiple STAs, so as to avoid frequently modifying the setting content of the sixth address, thereby reducing the transmission delay.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the above 17 and Table 18 can be the address setting methods of the first header of the management frame. Since the TDLS discovery response frame is encapsulated into a common management frame and does not need to be encrypted, the corresponding AAD structure may not be determined.
  • the first device sends the first data unit. Accordingly, the second device receives the first data unit from the first device.
  • the first header is constructed using the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the first AP to which the first device is connected.
  • the address of the first device, the address of the second device, and the address of the AP corresponding to the sixth direct link among the multiple APs of the third device are used to construct the first header, and the sixth direct link is used to construct the first header.
  • the link is a link between the first device and the second device for transmitting the first data unit. Therefore, the first device can transmit the first data unit through the direct link between the first device and the second device, without forwarding by the third device, and the data transmission rate can be increased.
  • the setting method of the sixth address can be compatible with the case where the first device includes one STA and the first device includes multiple STAs, and frequent modification of the setting content of the sixth address can be avoided, thereby further reducing the transmission delay.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of still another direct link addressing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the description is made by taking the second device as the TDLS initiator as an example.
  • the direct link addressing method can be applied to the communication between the STA device shown in FIG. 1 and the non-AP MLD2, or between the non-AP MLD1 and the non-AP MLD2.
  • the second device determines the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header
  • the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the first data unit may include a frame body, for example, the frame body may be a TDLS frame or data.
  • the first data unit may be the MPDU shown in FIG. 6
  • the first header may be the MPDU header shown in FIG. 6
  • the TDLS frame or data is carried in the Frame Body field.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the first The device is connected to the first AP of the third device.
  • the fourth address, fifth address and sixth address of the MPDU header are shown in Table 19. Since the initiating end and the responding end are changed, the difference between Table 19 and Table 17 in the above S1601 is that the setting contents of the fourth address and the fifth address are interchanged, see Table 19 for details, and will not be repeated here.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the second device
  • the sixth address is the same as the sixth address among the multiple APs of the third device.
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the direct link, and the sixth direct link is a link for transmitting the first data unit between the first device and the second device.
  • the first data unit is transmitted over a direct link between the first device and the second device.
  • the fourth address, fifth address and sixth address of the MPDU header are shown in Table 20. Since the initiating end and the responding end are changed, the difference between Table 20 and Table 18 in the above S1601 is that the setting contents of the fourth address and the fifth address are interchanged. For details, see Table 20, which will not be repeated here.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the second device sends the first data unit. Accordingly, the first device receives the first data unit from the second device.
  • the address setting rules constructed by the first data unit (eg, MPDU) and protected data (eg, AAD) provided in the embodiments of the present application are applicable to unicast frames.
  • AP MLD has 3 links, namely link 1, link 2 and link 3.
  • Two links are established between non-AP MLD 1 and AP MLD, namely link 1 and link 2; while Non-AP MLD 2 establishes link 1 and link 3 with AP MLD.
  • non-AP MLD 1 and non-AP MLD 2 can establish multi-link TDLS.
  • link 1 is called a public link
  • the other link is called a non-public link.
  • the corresponding link identifier can be the Link ID or BSSID of the AP associated with either end of the link. to instruct.
  • both ends of the non-public link can negotiate on which channel to transmit through the public link.
  • the opposite end is equivalent to non-basic channel (off-channel) transmission, it needs to notify the AP that it enters the doze (Doze) state, and then switches to the other end. Direct transmission is performed on the channel on which it is located.
  • Doze doze
  • non-AP MLDs at both ends are also allowed to use different address modes, such as transparent transmission mode and non-transparent transmission mode.
  • the non-AP MLD can send another TDLS Discovery Request frame, in which the BSSID in the Link Identifier element is set to the BSSID corresponding to Link 2, so that when the Legacy STA receives the TDLS Discovery Request frame Afterwards, it is found that the BSSID in the Link Identifier element is the same as the BSSID where it is located, and a TDLS Discovery Response frame will be returned on Link 2, so that the discovery is successful.
  • both the TDLS initiator and the responder are MLD
  • the Multi-link element is carried in the TDLS Discovery Request and TDLS Discovery Response frames respectively.
  • both ends know that the opposite end is also an MLD device type.
  • the TDLS initiator and the responder can know which links are public links.
  • the direct link addressing method provided by the embodiments of the present application has been described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 7 to 17 .
  • the direct link addressing device provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 18-19 .
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a direct-link addressing device that can be used to implement the direct-link addressing method provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1800 may be the first device or the second device, or may be a chip applied in the first device or the second device or other components with corresponding functions.
  • the direct link addressing device 1800 may include a processor 1801 and a transceiver 1803 .
  • Memory 1802 may also be included.
  • the processor 1801 is coupled with the memory 1802 and the transceiver 1803.
  • the processor 1801 can be connected through a communication bus, and the processor 1801 can also be used alone.
  • the processor 1801 is the control center of the direct link addressing device 1800, and may be a processor or a collective name of multiple processing elements.
  • the processor 1801 is one or more central processing units (CPUs), may also be a specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), or is configured to implement one or more embodiments of the present application
  • An integrated circuit such as: one or more microprocessors (digital signal processor, DSP), or, one or more field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA).
  • the processor 1801 can execute various functions of the direct link addressing device 1800 by running or executing software programs stored in the memory 1802 and calling data stored in the memory 1802 .
  • the processor 1801 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 shown in FIG. 18 .
  • the direct link addressing device 1800 may also include multiple processors, such as the processor 1801 and the processor 1804 shown in FIG. 18 .
  • processors can be a single-core processor (single-CPU) or a multi-core processor (multi-CPU).
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more communication devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
  • the memory 1802 may be read-only memory (ROM) or other type of static storage communication device that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM) or other type of static storage communication device that can store information and instructions.
  • Type of dynamic storage communication device it can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, Optical disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage communication devices, or capable of carrying or storing desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and Any other medium that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited to this.
  • the memory 1802 may be integrated with the processor 1801, or may exist independently, and be coupled to the processor 1801 through the input/output port (not shown in FIG. 18 ) of the direct link addressing device 1800. This is not specifically limited.
  • the memory 1802 is used for storing the software program for executing the solution of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1801 .
  • the processor 1801 controls the execution of the software program for executing the solution of the present application.
  • the transceiver 1803 is used for communication with other direct link addressing devices.
  • the transceiver 1803 may be used to communicate with the second device and the third device.
  • the transceiver 1803 may be used to communicate with the first device and the third device.
  • the transceiver 1803 may include a receiver and a transmitter (not shown separately in FIG. 18). Among them, the receiver is used to realize the receiving function, and the transmitter is used to realize the sending function.
  • the transceiver 1803 can be integrated with the processor 1801, or can exist independently, and is coupled to the processor 1801 through the input/output port (not shown in FIG. 18 ) of the direct link addressing device 1800, this embodiment of the present application This is not specifically limited.
  • the structure of the direct link addressing device 1800 shown in FIG. 18 does not constitute a limitation on the direct link addressing device, and the actual direct link addressing device may include more More or fewer components, or a combination of certain components, or a different arrangement of components.
  • the actions of the first device in the above steps S701-S702 and S1601-S1602 can be performed by the processor 1801 in the direct link addressing device 1800 shown in FIG. 18 calling the application code stored in the memory 1802 to instruct the remote End device execution.
  • the actions of the second device in the above steps S1501-S1502 and S1701-S1702 can be called by the processor 1801 in the direct link addressing device 1800 shown in FIG. 18 to call the application code stored in the memory 1802 to instruct the remote terminal device Implementation, this embodiment does not impose any restrictions on this.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of another direct link addressing device provided by an embodiment of the present application. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 19 only shows the main components of the direct link addressing device.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 includes a transceiver module 1901 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may further include a processing module 1902 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the first device or the second device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the transceiver module 1901 which may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, is configured to implement the transceiver function performed by the first device or the second device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver module 1901 may include a receiving module and a sending module (not shown in FIG. 19 ).
  • the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function performed by the first device or the second device in any of the above method embodiments; the sending module is used to implement the first device or the second device in any of the above method embodiments. send function.
  • This application does not specifically limit the specific implementation manner of the transceiver module 1901 .
  • the processing module 1902 which may also be referred to as a processing unit, may be used to implement the processing functions performed by the first device or the second device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the processing module 1902 can be a processor.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 is presented in the form of dividing each functional module in an integrated manner.
  • Module herein may refer to a specific ASIC, circuit, processor and memory executing one or more software or firmware programs, integrated logic circuit, and/or other device that may provide the functions described above.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may take the form of the direct link addressing device 1800 shown in FIG. 18 .
  • the processor 1801 in the direct-link addressing apparatus 1800 shown in FIG. 18 may execute the instructions by calling the computer stored in the memory 1802, so that the direct-link addressing apparatus 1800 executes the direct connection in the above method embodiments Link addressing method.
  • the functions/implementation process of the transceiver module 1901 and the processing module 1902 in FIG. 19 can be implemented by the processor 1801 in the direct link addressing device 1800 shown in FIG. 18 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1802 .
  • the function/implementation process of the processing module 1902 in FIG. 19 can be implemented by the processor 1801 in the direct link addressing device 1800 shown in FIG.
  • the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 1901 can be implemented by the transceiver 1803 in the direct link addressing device 1800 shown in FIG. 18 .
  • the direct-link addressing device 1900 provided in this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned direct-link addressing method, reference can be made to the above-mentioned method embodiments for the technical effects that can be obtained, and details are not described herein again.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 , performing the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 includes one or more station STAs, the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 is connected to a third device, the third device includes multiple access points AP, and the second device is connected to the third device , the second device includes multiple STAs.
  • the processing module 1902 is used to determine the protected data.
  • the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 includes one STA
  • the first address is the address of the second device
  • the second address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 is connected to the first AP of the third device.
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 includes multiple STAs
  • the first address is the address of the second device
  • the second address is the address of the direct link addressing apparatus 1900
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the transceiver module 1901 is used for sending the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header, the first header is determined according to the protected data, and the first data unit is transmitted through the direct link between the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 and the second device.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 19 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1902 executes the program or the instruction, the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 can perform the function of the first device in the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the first device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in the first device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 7 . function of the second device.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 includes a plurality of station STAs, the direct link addressing device 1900 is connected to a third device, the third device includes a plurality of access points AP, the first device is connected to the third device, and the third device is connected to the third device.
  • a device includes one or more STAs.
  • the transceiver module 1901 is used for receiving the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header, the first header is determined according to the protected data, and the first data unit is transmitted through the direct link between the first device and the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 .
  • the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the first address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the second address is the address of the first device
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the first device Connect with the first AP of the third device.
  • the first device includes multiple STAs
  • the first address is the address of the direct link addressing apparatus 1900
  • the second address is the address of the first device
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may further include a processing module 1902 and a storage module (not shown in FIG. 19 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1902 executes the program or the instruction
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 can perform the function of the second device in the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the second device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in the second device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to execute the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 15 . function of the second device.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 includes a plurality of station STAs, the direct link addressing device 1900 is connected to a third device, the third device includes a plurality of access points AP, the first device is connected to the third device, and the third device is connected to the third device.
  • a device includes one or more STAs.
  • the processing module 1902 is used to determine the protected data.
  • the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the first address is the address of the first device
  • the second address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the first device Connect with the first AP of the third device.
  • the first device includes multiple STAs
  • the first address is the address of the first device
  • the second address is the address of the direct link addressing apparatus 1900
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the transceiver module 1901 is used for sending the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header, the first header is determined according to the protected data, and the first data unit is transmitted through the direct link between the first device and the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 .
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 19 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1902 executes the program or the instruction, the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 can perform the function of the second device in the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 15 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the second device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in the second device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to execute the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 15 . function of the first device.
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 includes one or more station STAs, the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 is connected to a third device, the third device includes multiple access points AP, and the second device is connected to the third device , the second device includes multiple STAs.
  • the transceiver module 1901 is used for receiving the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header, the first header is determined according to the protected data, and the first data unit is transmitted through the direct link between the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 and the second device.
  • the protected data includes a first address, a second address and a third address.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 includes one STA
  • the first address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the second address is the address of the second device
  • the third address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 is connected to the first AP of the third device
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 includes one STA.
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 includes multiple STAs
  • the first address is the address of the direct link addressing apparatus 1900
  • the second address is the address of the second device
  • the third address is the address of the third device.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may further include a processing module 1902 and a storage module (not shown in FIG. 19 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1902 executes the program or the instruction
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 can perform the function of the first device in the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 15 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the first device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in the first device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 16 . function of the first device.
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 includes one or more station STAs, the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 is connected to a third device, the third device includes multiple access points AP, and the second device is connected to the third device , the second device includes multiple STAs.
  • the processing module 1902 is configured to determine the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header and a tunnel direct link establishment TDLS frame
  • the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 includes one STA
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 is connected to the first AP of the third device.
  • the fourth address is the address of the second device
  • the fifth address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the sixth address is one of the multiple APs of the third device The address of the AP corresponding to the sixth direct link, where the sixth direct link is a link for transmitting TDLS frames between the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 and the second device.
  • the transceiver module 1901 is used for sending the first data unit.
  • the first data unit is transmitted over the direct link between the direct link addressing device 1900 and the second device.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 19 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1902 executes the program or the instruction, the direct link addressing device 1900 can perform the function of the first device in the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 16 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the first device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in the first device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 16 . function of the second device.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 includes a plurality of station STAs, the direct link addressing device 1900 is connected to a third device, the third device includes a plurality of access points AP, the first device is connected to the third device, and the third device is connected to the third device.
  • a device includes one or more STAs.
  • the transceiver module 1901 is used for receiving the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header and a tunnel direct link establishment TDLS frame
  • the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the fourth address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the first device Connect with the first AP of the third device.
  • the fourth address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the fifth address is the address of the first device
  • the sixth address is the address of the third device among the multiple APs and the sixth direct link
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the link, and the sixth direct link is a link for transmitting TDLS frames between the first device and the direct link addressing device 1900 .
  • the first data unit is transmitted through the direct link between the first device and the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 .
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may further include a processing module 1902 and a storage module (not shown in FIG. 19 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1902 executes the program or the instruction
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 can perform the function of the second device in the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 16 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the second device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in the second device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 17 . function of the second device.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 includes a plurality of station STAs, the direct link addressing device 1900 is connected to a third device, the third device includes a plurality of access points AP, the first device is connected to the third device, and the third device is connected to the third device.
  • a device includes one or more STAs.
  • the processing module 1902 is configured to determine the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header and a tunnel direct link establishment TDLS frame, and the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the transceiver module 1901 is used for sending the first data unit.
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device
  • the fourth address is the address of the first device
  • the fifth address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900
  • the sixth address is the address of the third device among the multiple APs that are directly connected to the sixth direct link address.
  • the address of the AP corresponding to the link, and the sixth direct link is a link for transmitting TDLS frames between the first device and the direct link addressing device 1900 .
  • the first data unit is transmitted through the direct link between the first device and the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 .
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may further include a processing module 1902 and a storage module (not shown in FIG. 19 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1902 executes the program or the instruction
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 can perform the function of the second device in the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the second device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in the second device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 shown in FIG. 19 can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 17 . function of the first device.
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 includes one or more station STAs, the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 is connected to a third device, the third device includes multiple access points AP, and the second device is connected to the third device , the second device includes multiple STAs.
  • the transceiver module 1901 is used for receiving the first data unit.
  • the first data unit includes a first header and a tunnel direct link establishment TDLS frame
  • the first header includes a fourth address, a fifth address and a sixth address.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 When the direct link addressing device 1900 includes one STA, the fourth address is the address of the direct link addressing device 1900, the fifth address is the address of the second device, and the sixth address is the address of the first AP of the third device , the direct link addressing device 1900 is connected to the first AP of the third device.
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 includes multiple STAs, the fourth address is the address of the direct link addressing apparatus 1900, the fifth address is the address of the second device, and the sixth address is one of the multiple APs of the third device
  • the first data unit is transmitted over the direct link between the direct link addressing device 1900 and the second device.
  • the TDLS frame may be a TDLS discovery response frame.
  • the direct link addressing device 1900 may further include a processing module 1902 and a storage module (not shown in FIG. 19 ), where the storage module stores programs or instructions.
  • the processing module 1902 executes the program or the instruction
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 can perform the function of the first device in the direct link addressing method shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the direct link addressing apparatus 1900 may be the first device, or may be a chip (system) or other components or components that can be provided in the first device, which is not limited in this application.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication system.
  • the communication system includes: a first device and a second device.
  • a second device may also be included.
  • the first device is configured to perform the actions of the first device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the second device is configured to perform the actions of the second device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the third device is configured to execute the actions of the third device in the foregoing method embodiments. For specific execution methods and processes, reference may be made to the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor and an input/output port, where the processor is configured to implement the processing functions involved in the direct link addressing method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the input The /output port is used for the transceiving function involved in the addressing method of the direct link provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip system further includes a memory, where the memory is used to store program instructions and data for implementing the functions involved in the direct link addressing method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium includes a computer program or an instruction, and when the computer program or instruction runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the direct link search provided by the embodiment of the present application. address method.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product
  • the computer program product includes: a computer program or an instruction, when the computer program or the instruction runs on a computer, the computer executes the direct link addressing method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • processors in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), dedicated integrated Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • enhanced SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Fetch memory
  • direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware (eg, circuits), firmware, or any other combination.
  • the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center by wire (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that contains one or more sets of available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
  • at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c may be single or multiple .
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the embodiments of the present application. implementation constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as stand-alone products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Circuits Of Receivers In General (AREA)
  • Information Retrieval, Db Structures And Fs Structures Therefor (AREA)
  • Vehicle Body Suspensions (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供一种直连链路寻址方法及装置，non-AP MLD与non-AP MLD之间，或STA设备与non-AP MLD之间能够直接进行通信，从而提高数据传输效率。可应用于WiFi系统中。该方法应用于第一设备，第一设备包括一个或多个站点STA，第一设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。当第一设备包括一个STA，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第一设备连接的第一AP的地址构建被保护数据。第一设备包括多个STA时，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第三设备的地址构建被保护数据。从而第一设备可以通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输第一数据单元，可以提高数据传输速率。

Description

直连链路寻址方法及装置
本申请要求于2021年03月15日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202110278095.3、申请名称为“直连链路寻址方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，尤其涉及一种直连链路寻址方法及装置。
背景技术
随着无线通信技术的发展，越来越多的无线通信设备支持多链路通信，可以提高通信设备的通信效率。其中，支持多链路通信的通信设备可以称之为多链路设备(multi link device，MLD)。多链路设备包括接入点(non-access point，AP)MLD和非接入点(non-access point，non-AP)MLD。其中，AP MLD包括多个AP，non-AP MLD包括多个站点STA。当通信系统中包括至少一个AP MLD和多个non-AP MLD时，non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间可以通过多条链路进行通信，两个non-AP MLD之间可以通过AP MLD进行通信。该通信系统中还可以包括站点(station，STA)设备。其中，STA设备包括一个STA，STA设备与non-AP MLD之间可以通过AP MLD进行通信。
然而，两个non-AP MLD之间、或STA设备与non-AP MLD之间的通信仍需要通过AP MLD进行转发，增加了传输时延。第一non-AP MLD与第二non-AP MLD之间，或STA设备与non-AP MLD之间如何建立直连链路进行通信，业界尚未给出相应地解决方案。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种直连链路寻址方法及装置，non-AP MLD与non-AP MLD之间，或STA设备与non-AP MLD之间能够直接进行通信，从而提高数据传输效率。
为达到上述目的，本申请采用如下技术方案：
第一方面，提供一种直连链路寻址方法，应用于第一设备，第一设备包括一个或多个站点STA，第一设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。该直连链路寻址方法包括：确定被保护数据，发送第一数据单元。其中，被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第一地址为第二设备的地址，第二地址为第一设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第一地址为第二设备的地址，第二地址为第一设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头是根据被保护数据确定的，第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
基于第一方面所述的直连链路寻址方法，当第一设备包括一个STA，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第一设备连接的第一AP的地址构建被保护数据。第 一设备包括多个STA时，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第三设备的地址构建被保护数据。从而第一设备可以通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输第一数据单元，可以提高数据传输速率。另外，第一设备包括多个STA时，采用设备地址构建被保护数据，直连链路的变化，不影响被保护数据，从而在多条直连链路之间跨链路传输数据时，不需要重新进行加密，可以进一步提高数据传输速率。
可选地，被保护数据可以为额外真实数据(additional authentical data，AAD)，第一数据单元可以为管理协议数据单元(management protocol data unit，MPDU)。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一报头可以包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址。如此，Legacy STA和第二设备可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
可选地，第一报头可以为MPDU报头。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一报头可以包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第二设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第五地址为第一设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第一直连链路对应的AP的地址，第一直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。如此，non-AP MLD与non-AP MLD可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一数据单元可以包括隧道直连链路建立(tunneled direct-link setup，TDLS)帧，TDLS帧可以包括第一元素，第一元素可用于指示目标链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址，目标链路为TDLS帧应用的第二直连链路，第二直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。如此，对于链路级别(link-level)的TDLS帧，可以指示该TDLS帧是应用在哪条直连链路上的。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS信道切换请求(Channel Switch Request)帧或TDLS信道切换响应(Channel Switch Response)帧。TDLS Channel Switch Request用于请求所述目标链路从当前信道切换至另一信道，TDLS Channel Switch Response用于指示同意或不同意所述目标链路从当前信道切换至另一信道。如此，第一设备和第二设备可以将目标链路从当前信道切换至另一信道进行通信，在多链路TDLS场景下，TDLS Channel Switch Request/Response可以通过任意一条直连链路进行传输。
可选地，第一元素可以为链路标识元素(Link Identifier element)，或者为一个新定义的元素。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素可用于指示传输链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输链路对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。如此，Legacy STA和第二设备可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输链路对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。也就是说，TDLS帧为TDLS 发现响应帧对应的第一元素的设置内容与TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧对应的第一元素的设置内容相同。如此，Legacy STA和第二设备可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素用于指示第一设备与第三设备之间的链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。如此，Legacy STA和第二设备可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，TDLS帧为TDLS建立响应帧、TDLS建立确认帧、TDLS拆除帧、TDLS信道切换请求帧、TDLS信道切换响应帧、TDLS对端节能管理请求帧、TDLS对端节能管理响应帧、TDLS对端流量指示帧或TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素的具体实现方式可参照上述当第一设备包括一个STA且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素的实现方式，此处不再赘述。如此，non-AP MLD与non-AP MLD可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。可选地，参考链路可以为Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路。如此，non-AP MLD与non-AP MLD可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路对应的AP的地址。其中，公共链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，公共链路对应的第一设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP与公共链路对应的第二设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP相同。如此，non-AP MLD与non-AP MLD可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧、TDLS建立响应帧或TDLS建立确认帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。如此，接收端可以知道对应的参考链路是哪条链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS拆除帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。如此，接收端可以知道该帧是关联在哪个AP MLD下的哪个设备发的。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS对端流量指示帧、或者TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。如此，接收端可以知道该帧是关联在哪个AP MLD下的哪个设备发的。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一数据单元可以包括隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，TDLS帧可以包括唤醒调度元素和第二元素。其中，唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于第三直连链路的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，第二元素可用于指示第三直连链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与第三直连链路对应的AP的地址，第三直 连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。如此，才能准确地知道什么时间周期性地唤醒并收发数据，从而可以节省功耗。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS对端节能管理请求帧和TDLS对端节能管理响应帧。如此，在多链路TDLS场景下，TDLS Peer PSM Request/Response可以通过任意一条直连链路进行传输，且接收端能正确解析唤醒调度元素。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一数据单元可以包括第三元素，第三元素可用于指示在第一链路上建立至少一条第四直连链路。第一链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，第一链路可以包括至少一条第四直连链路。
如此，第一设备与第二设备可以在公共链路上建立直连链路，以提高数据传输速率。
也是就说，第一链路可以为第一设备与第三设备、第二设备与第三设备之间的公共链路，第一链路对应的第一设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP与第一链路对应的第二设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP相同。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第三元素可以包括直连链路数量字段和直连链路标识符字段，直连链路数量字段可用于指示请求建立的第四直连链路的数量，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中分别与至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址或至少一条第四直连链路的标识。
如此，通过指示建立第四直连链路的数量，可以实现在第一链路的部分或全部链路上建立第四直连链路，提高直连链路建立的灵活性。可以通过直连链路标识符字段指示在哪些链路上建立直连链路。
在一种可能的设计方式中，直连链路标识符字段还可以包括第一设备的第一STA的地址和第二设备的第二STA的地址。也就是说，直连链路标识符字段可以包括直连链路两端的隶属STA的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第七地址与TDLS对等秘钥(TDLS peer key，TPK)绑定，第七地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备和第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址或者第三设备的所有AP的地址、以及第三设备的地址。如此，可以提高第一设备与第二设备之间通过直连链路通信的安全性。
第二方面，提供一种直连链路寻址方法，应用于第二设备，第二设备包括多个站点STA，第二设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与第三设备连接，第一设备包括一个或多个STA。该直连链路寻址方法包括：接收第一数据单元，解析第一数据单元获得第一报头。其中，第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的，第一报头可以包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第二设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第五地址为第一设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第一直连链路对应的AP的地址，第一直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第二方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：根 据第一报头获得被保护数据。其中，被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第一地址为第二设备的地址，第二地址为第一设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第一地址为第二设备的地址，第二地址为第一设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第二方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：解析第一数据单元获得隧道直连链路建立(tunneled direct-link setup，TDLS)帧，TDLS帧可以包括第一元素，第一元素可用于指示目标链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址，目标链路为TDLS帧应用的第二直连链路，第二直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS信道切换请求(Channel Switch Request)帧或TDLS信道切换响应帧(Channel Switch Response)。TDLS Channel Switch Request用于请求所述目标链路从当前信道切换至另一信道，TDLS Channel Switch Response用于指示同意或不同意所述目标链路从当前信道切换至另一信道。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素可用于指示传输链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输链路对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输链路对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。也就是说，TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧对应的第一元素的设置内容可以与TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧对应的第一元素的设置内容相同。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素用于指示第一设备与第三设备之间的链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，TDLS帧为TDLS建立响应帧、TDLS建立确认帧、TDLS拆除帧、TDLS信道切换请求帧、TDLS信道切换响应帧、TDLS对端节能管理请求帧、TDLS对端节能管理响应帧、TDLS对端流量指示帧或TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素的具体实现方式可参照上述当第一设备包括一个STA且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素的实现方式，此处不再赘述。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。可选地，参考链路可以为Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路对应的AP的地址。其中，公共链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，公共链路对应的第一设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP与公共链路对应的第二设备的STA 关联的第三设备的AP相同。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧、TDLS建立响应帧或TDLS建立确认帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS拆除帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS对端流量指示帧、或者TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第二方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：解析第一数据单元获得TDLS帧，TDLS帧可以包括唤醒调度元素和第二元素。其中，唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于第三直连链路的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，第二元素可用于指示第三直连链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与第三直连链路对应的AP的地址，第三直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS对端节能管理请求帧和TDLS对端节能管理响应帧。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第二方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：解析第一数据单元获得第三元素，第三元素可用于指示在第一链路上建立至少一条第四直连链路。第一链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，第一链路可以包括至少一条第四直连链路。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第三元素可以包括直连链路数量字段和直连链路标识符字段，直连链路数量字段可用于指示请求建立的第四直连链路的数量，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中分别与至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址或至少一条第四直连链路的标识。
在一种可能的设计方式中，直连链路标识符字段还可以包括第一设备的第一STA的地址和第二设备的第二STA的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第七地址与TDLS对等秘钥绑定，第七地址可以包括第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备和第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址或者第三设备的所有AP的地址、以及第三设备的地址。
此外，第二方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第三方面，提供一种直连链路寻址方法，应用于第二设备，第二设备包括多个站点STA，第二设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与第三设备连接，第一设备包括一个或多个STA。该直连链路寻址方法包括：确定被保护数据，发送第一数据单元。其中，被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第一地址为第一设备的地址，第二地址为第二设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第一地址为第一设备的地址，第二地址为第二设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头是根据被保护数据确定的，第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一报头可以包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址。如此，保持协议的兼容性，当第二设备作为TDLS发起端时，可以使legacy STA正确解析第一数据单元，从而legacy STA与non-AP MLD可以通过直连链路进行通信，可以提高数据传输速率。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第一设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第五地址为第二设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第一直连链路对应的AP的地址，第一直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一数据单元可以包括隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，TDLS帧可以包括第一元素，第一元素可用于指示目标链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址，目标链路为TDLS帧应用的第二直连链路，第二直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一数据单元可以包括隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，TDLS帧可以包括唤醒调度元素和第二元素。其中，唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于第三直连链路的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，第二元素可用于指示第三直连链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与第三直连链路对应的AP的地址，第三直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。其中，参考链路可以为Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路。如此，保持协议的兼容性。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输链路对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。也就是说，TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧对应的第一元素的设置内容可以与TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧对应的第一元素的设置内容相同。如此，保持协议的兼容性。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素用于指示第一设备与第三设备之间的链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。如此，保持协议的兼容性。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，TDLS帧为TDLS建立响应帧、TDLS建立确认帧、TDLS拆除帧、TDLS信道切换请求帧、TDLS信道切换响应帧、TDLS对端节能管理请求帧、TDLS对端节能管理响应帧、TDLS对端流量指示帧或TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素的具体实现方式可参照上述当第一设备包括一个STA且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素的实现方式，此处不再赘述。如此，保持协议的兼容性。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧 时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。可选地，参考链路可以为Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路对应的AP的地址。其中，公共链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，公共链路对应的第一设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP与公共链路对应的第二设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP相同。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧、TDLS建立响应帧或TDLS建立确认帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS拆除帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS对端流量指示帧、或者TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一数据单元可以包括第三元素，第三元素可用于指示在第一链路上建立至少一条第四直连链路。第一链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，第一链路可以包括至少一条第四直连链路。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第三元素可以包括直连链路数量字段和直连链路标识符字段，直连链路数量字段可用于指示请求建立的第四直连链路的数量，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中分别与至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址或至少一条第四直连链路的标识。
在一种可能的设计方式中，直连链路标识符字段还可以包括第一设备的第一STA的地址和第二设备的第二STA的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第七地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定，第七地址可以包括第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备和第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址或者第三设备的所有AP的地址、以及第三设备的地址。
此外，第三方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第四方面，提供一种直连链路寻址方法，应用于第一设备，第一设备包括一个或多个站点STA，第一设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。该直连链路寻址方法包括：接收第一数据单元，解析第一数据单元获得第一报头。其中，第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。第一报头可以包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第一设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第五地址为第二设备的多个STA 中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第一直连链路对应的AP的地址，第一直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第四方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：根据第一报头获得被保护数据。其中，被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第一地址为第一设备的地址，第二地址为第二设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接，第一设备包括一个STA。当第一设备包括多个STA，第一地址为第一设备的地址，第二地址为第二设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第四方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：解析第一数据单元获得隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，TDLS帧可以包括第一元素，第一元素可用于指示目标链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址，目标链路为TDLS帧应用的第二直连链路，第二直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。其中，参考链路可以为Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输链路对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。也就是说，TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧对应的第一元素的设置内容可以与TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧对应的第一元素的设置内容相同。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素用于指示第一设备与第三设备之间的链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括一个STA，TDLS帧为TDLS建立响应帧、TDLS建立确认帧、TDLS拆除帧、TDLS信道切换请求帧、TDLS信道切换响应帧、TDLS对端节能管理请求帧、TDLS对端节能管理响应帧、TDLS对端流量指示帧或TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素的具体实现方式可参照上述当第一设备包括一个STA且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素的实现方式，此处不再赘述。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。可选地，参考链路可以为Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路对应的AP的地址。其中，公共链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，公共链路对应的第一设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP与公共链路对应的第二设备的STA 关联的第三设备的AP相同。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧、TDLS建立响应帧或TDLS建立确认帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS拆除帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。
一种可能的设计中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS对端流量指示帧、或者TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第四方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：解析第一数据单元获得TDLS帧，TDLS帧可以包括唤醒调度元素和第二元素。其中，唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于第三直连链路的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，第二元素可用于指示第三直连链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与第三直连链路对应的AP的地址，第三直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS对端节能管理请求帧和TDLS对端节能管理响应帧。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第四方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：解析第一数据单元获得第三元素，第三元素可用于指示在第一链路上建立至少一条第四直连链路。第一链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，第一链路可以包括至少一条第四直连链路。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第三元素可以包括直连链路数量字段和直连链路标识符字段，直连链路数量字段可用于指示请求建立的第四直连链路的数量，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中分别与至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址或至少一条第四直连链路的标识。
在一种可能的设计方式中，直连链路标识符字段还可以包括第一设备的第一STA的地址和第二设备的第二STA的地址。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第七地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定，第七地址可以包括第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备和第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址或者第三设备的所有AP的地址、以及第三设备的地址。
此外，第四方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果可以参考第一方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第五方面，提供一种直连链路寻址方法，应用于第一设备，第一设备包括一个或多个站点STA，第一设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。该直连链路寻址方法包括：确定第一数据单元，发送第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路 为第一设备与第二设备之间传输第一数据单元的链路。第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一数据单元还包括帧体，帧体可以为TDLS帧或者数据。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
基于第五方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，当第一设备包括一个STA，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第一设备连接的第一AP的地址构建第一报头。第一设备包括多个STA时，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址构建第一报头，第六直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间传输TDLS帧的链路。从而第一设备可以通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输第一数据单元，不需要第三设备的转发，可以提高数据传输速率。另外，第六地址的设置方式可以兼容第一设备包括一个STA和第一设备包括多个STA的情况，可以避免频繁修改第六地址的设置内容，从而可以进一步降低传输时延。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。TDLS发现响应帧被封装成公共管理帧，不需要加密，因而可以不确定对应的AAD构造。
第六方面，提供一种直连链路寻址方法，应用于第二设备，第二设备包括多个站点STA，第二设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与第三设备连接，第一设备包括一个或多个STA。所述直连链路寻址方法包括：接收第一数据单元，解析第一数据单元获得第一报头。其中，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间传输第一数据单元的链路。第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第六方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：解析第一数据单元获得帧体，帧体可以为TDLS帧或者数据。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
此外，第六方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果可以参考第五方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第七方面，提供一种直连链路寻址方法，应用于第二设备，第二设备包括多个站点STA，第二设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与第三设备连接，第一设备包括一个或多个STA。所述直连链路寻址方法包括：确定第一数据单元，发送第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址， 第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间传输第一数据单元的链路。第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第一数据单元还包括帧体，帧体可以为TDLS帧或者数据。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
此外，第七方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果可以参考第五方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第八方面，提供一种直连链路寻址方法，应用于第一设备，第一设备包括一个或多个站点STA，第一设备与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。该直连链路寻址方法包括：接收第一数据单元，解析第一数据单元获得第一报头。其中，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间传输第一数据单元的链路。第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
在一种可能的设计方式中，第八方面提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括：解析第一数据单元获得帧体，帧体可以为TDLS帧或者数据。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
此外，第八方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果可以参考第五方面所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第九方面，提供一种直连链路寻址装置。该直连链路寻址装置包括：用于执行第一方面、第四方面、第五方面、或第八方面中任一项所述方法的单元或模块。
在本申请中，第九方面所述的直连链路寻址装置可以为第一设备，或者可设置于第一设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件。
此外，第九方面所述的直连链路寻址装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面或第五方面中的任意一种实现方式所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第十方面，提供一种直连链路寻址装置。该直连链路寻址装置包括：用于执行第二方面、第三方面、第六方面、或第七方面中任一项所述方法的单元或模块。
在本申请中，第十方面所述的直连链路寻址装置可以为第二设备，或者可设置于第二设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件。
此外，第十方面所述的直连链路寻址装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面或第五方面中的任意一种实现方式所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第十一方面，提供一种直连链路寻址装置。该直连链路寻址装置包括：处理器，该处理器与存储器耦合，存储器用于存储计算机程序。处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得该直连链路寻址装置执行如第一方面至第八方面中任一种可能 的实现方式所述的直连链路寻址方法。
在一种可能的设计中，第十一方面所述的直连链路寻址装置还可以包括收发器。该收发器可以为收发电路或输入/输出端口。所述收发器可以用于该直连链路寻址装置与其他设备通信。
在本申请中，第十一方面所述的直连链路寻址装置可以为第一设备、或第二设备，或者设置于第一设备、或第二设备内部的芯片或芯片系统。
此外，第十一方面所述的直连链路寻址装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面至第八方面中任一种实现方式所述的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
第十二方面，提供一种通信系统。该通信系统包括第一设备和第二设备。
第十三方面，提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器和输入/输出端口，所述处理器用于实现第一方面至第八方面所涉及的处理功能，所述输入/输出端口用于实现第一方面至第八方面所涉及的收发功能。
在一种可能的设计中，该芯片系统还包括存储器，该存储器用于存储实现第一方面至第八方面所涉及功能的程序指令和数据。
该芯片系统，可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
第十四方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，包括：计算机程序或指令；当该计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行第一方面至第八方面中任意一种可能的实现方式所述的直连链路寻址方法。
第十五方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，包括计算机程序或指令，当该计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行第一方面至第八方面中任意一种可能的实现方式所述的直连链路寻址方法。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的通信系统的架构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的参与通信的AP MLD和non-AP MLD的结构示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种Multi-link element的帧结构的示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种Link Identifier element的帧结构的示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种AAD的帧结构的示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种MPDU的帧结构的示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种直连链路寻址方法的流程示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种参与通信的AP MLD、legacy STA和non-AP MLD2的结构示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种参与通信的AP MLD、non-AP MLD1和non-AP MLD2的结构示意图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种参与通信的non-AP MLD1和non-AP MLD2的结构示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种Wakeup Schedule element的帧结构的示意图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种Multi-link element的帧结构的示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种帧体的帧结构的示意图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种TDLS Link Info element的帧结构的示意图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的另一种直连链路寻址方法的流程示意图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的又一种直连链路寻址方法的流程示意图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的又一种直连链路寻址方法的流程示意图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种直连链路寻址装置的结构示意图；
图19为本申请实施例提供的另一种直连链路寻址装置的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
在本申请的描述中，除非另有说明，“/”表示“或”的意思，例如，A/B可以表示A或B。本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。此外，“至少一个”是指一个或多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定，并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。
本申请将围绕可包括多个设备、组件、模块等的系统来呈现各个方面、实施例或特征。应当理解和明白的是，各个系统可以包括另外的设备、组件、模块等，并且/或者可以并不包括结合附图讨论的所有设备、组件、模块等。此外，还可以使用这些方案的组合。
本申请中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言，使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。
多链路设备(multipe link device，MLD)包括一个或多个隶属的站点，隶属的站点是逻辑上的站点，“多链路设备包括隶属站点”在本申请实施例中也简要描述为“多链路设备包括站点”。隶属的站点可以为AP或非接入点站点(non-AP STA)。为描述方便，本申请将隶属的站点为AP的多链路设备称为AP MLD，或者多链路AP，或者多链路AP设备，或者接入点AP。将隶属的站点为AP的单链路设备称为AP设备，或者接入点，或者AP，或者单链路AP设备等，或者接入点AP。将隶属的站点为non-AP STA的多链路设备称为non-AP MLD，或者多链路STA，或者多链路STA设备，或者STA MLD等。将隶属的站点为non-AP STA的单链路设备称为STA设备，或者站点，或者STA，或者non-AP STA等。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如采用IEEE 802.11标准的系统。示例性的，IEEE 802.11标准包括但不限于：802.11be标准、或者更下一代的802.11标准。本申请的技术方案适用的场景包括：non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间的通信、STA设备与AP MLD之间的通信，non-AP MLD与non-AP MLD之间的通信，STA设备与non-AP MLD之间的通信。
多链路设备MLD可以遵循IEEE 802.11系列标准实现无线通信，例如，遵循极高吞吐率(extremely high throughput，EHT)，或遵循基于802.11be或兼容支持802.11be，从而实现与其他设备的通信，当然其他设备可以是多链路设备，也可以不是多链路设备。
本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例 的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题，同样适用。
为便于理解本申请实施例，首先以图1中示出的通信系统为例详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。示例性地，图1为本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法所适用的一种通信系统的架构示意图。
如图1所示，该通信系统包括至少一个AP MLD和至少一个non-AP MLD，如non-AP MLD1和non-AP MLD2。可选地，该通信系统还可以包括至少一个STA设备。AP MLD可以包括多个AP，non-AP MLD可以包括多个STA，STA设备包括一个STA，该STA设备可以称之为legacy STA。
其中，上述AP MLD是一种部署在无线通信网络中为其关联的STA提供无线通信功能的装置。该AP MLD包括但不限于：无线保真(wireless fidelity，WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point，AP)，如家庭网关、路由器、服务器、交换机、网桥等，演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)、节点B(Node B，NB)、基站控制器(base station controller，BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，home evolved NodeB，或home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)，无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission and reception point，TRP或者transmission point，TP)等，还可以为5G，如，新空口(new radio，NR)系统中的gNB，或，传输点(TRP或TP)，5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板，或者，还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点，如基带单元(BBU)，或，分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)、具有基站功能的路边单元(road side unit，RSU)等。
上述non-AP MLD或STA设备为接入上述通信系统，且具有无线收发功能的终端或可设置于该终端的芯片或芯片系统。该终端设备也可以称为用户装置、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、车载终端、具有终端功能的RSU等。本申请的终端设备还可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元，车辆通过内置的所述车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元可以实施本申请提供的直连链路寻址方法。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法，可以适用于图1所示的任意两个节点之间，具体实现可以参考下述方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
应当指出的是，本申请实施例中的方案还可以应用于其他通信系统中，相应的名称也可以用其他通信系统中的对应功能的名称进行替代。
应理解，图1仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图，该通信系统中还可以包括其他设备，图1中未予以画出。
多链路设备工作的频段可以包括但不限于：1GHz以下(sub1GHz)、2.4GHz、5GHz、6GHz、和高频60GHz。并且，MLD可以在同一频段上通过多个信道进行通信。该多频段或多信道可以统称为多链路。通过多链路通信的方式提高峰值吞吐量，降低业务传输的时延，进而提高MLD之间通信的速率。
图2示出了参与通信的AP MLD和non-AP MLD的结构示意图。如图2所示，AP MLD包括隶属的AP1和AP2。其中，AP1和AP2在低(low)媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层和物理层(physical layer，PHY)互相独立，共用高MAC(high MAC)层。non-AP MLD包括隶属的STA1和STA2。其中，STA1和STA2在低MAC层和PHY层互相独立，共用高MAC层。AP MLD与non-AP MLD之间可以通过链路1和链路2进行通信，链路1的一端连接AP MLD的AP1，另一端连接non-AP MLD的STA1，链路2的一端连接AP MLD的AP2，另一端连接non-AP MLD的STA2。
多链路设备对应有多链路设备地址，多链路设备的每条链路对应各自的链路地址。以AP MLD为例，多链路设备地址可以为AP MLD MAC地址(address)。以non-AP MLD为例，多链路设备地址可以为STA MLD MAC地址。AP MLD与non-AP MLD之间的链路地址可以包括链路两端对应的隶属AP MAC地址(affiliated AP MAC address)和隶属STA MAC地址(affiliated STA MAC address)。
需要说明的是，图2中仅示出了AP MLD和non-AP MLD工作在两条链路上，本申请实施例对AP MLD和non-AP MLD工作的链路的数量不进行限定。
示例性的，多链路设备为具有无线通信功能的装置，该装置可以为一个整机的设备，还可以是安装在整机设备中的芯片或处理系统等，安装这些芯片或处理系统的设备可以在这些芯片或处理系统的控制下，实现本申请实施例的方法和功能。
下面结合图2和图3对non-AP MLD和AP MLD之间进行多链路建立进行具体阐述。
non-AP MLD可以通过其中一条链路进行多链路建立操作来实现与AP MLD的多条链路同时建立关联。在关联过程中，non-AP MLD与AP MLD可以在一条链路上交互关联请求/响应(Association Request/Response)帧。其中，用于交互Association Request/Response帧的链路可以被称为传输链路(传输链路)，其他的链路即为非传输链路(Non-transmitted Link)。应理解，Association Request/Response可以携带需要关联的多条链路的信息以实现non-AP MLD和AP MLD之间同时关联多条链路。
例如，结合图2，non-AP MLD在链路1上发送一个Association Request帧，Association Request帧携带链路1的STA侧信息以及链路2的STA侧信息。应理解，链路1可以被称为传输链路，链路2可以被称为非传输链路。AP MLD在链路1上向non-AP MLD发送Association Response帧，Association Response帧可以携带链路1的AP侧信息以及链路2的AP侧信息。从而，non-AP MLD和AP MLD在链路1和链路2上建立起关联。进而，non-AP MLD和AP MLD可以在链路1和链路2上进行数据传输。
为了进行多链路操作，可以在与多链路操作相关的帧中指示多条链路的相关信息。 为此，协议定义了多链路元素(Multi-link element)。示例性的，如图3所示，其中，Multi-link element所携带的信息主要分为两部分，一部分为多链路设备级信息(MLD-level info)，包括Multi-link Control字段、MLD MAC Address等字段，另一部分为每个站点(Per-STA Profile)信息，其携带非传输链路的相关信息。Per-STA Profile中会指示对应链路的链路标识(Link ID)，链路标识可用于指示Per-STA profile是对应哪条链路上相关STA的信息。其中，MLD MAC Address字段携带发送端的MLD MAC Address。
为了节省信令开销，Multi-link element采用了继承结构。当非传输链路中相应的element与传输链路中对应的element的内容相同时，则非传输链路中相应的element不需要携带在该链路的Per-STA Profile中。只有所对应的element的内容不同时，才会携带在该链路的Per-STA Profile中。
需要说明的是，多链路元素的具体格式不限于图3所示，本申请对链路标识元素的具体格式不进行限定。
应理解，non-AP MLD可以通过接收探测响应帧或者信标帧来获得每条链路对应的链路信息(例如链路标识)，还可以获得每条链路所工作的信道和每条链路的地址，如链路的基本服务集标识符(basic service set identifier，BSSID)。
下面结合表1和图4对两个STA设备之间进行隧道直连链路建立(tunneled direct-link setup，TDLS)进行具体阐述，图4为本申请实施例提供的一种Link Identifier element的帧结构的示意图。
假设第一STA设备与第二STA设备均与同一个AP设备连接，第一STA设备包括一个STA，第二STA设备包括一个STA。如果第一STA设备与第二STA设备处于无线通信可达范围内，可以在第一STA设备与第二STA设备之间建立直连链路，从而第一STA设备与第二STA设备可以通过该直连链路直接进行通信，不需要通过AP设备转发，可以提高数据传输速率，减少时延。
示例性地，TDLS相关操作包括但不限于如下一项或多项：TDLS发现、TDLS建立、TDLS拆除、TDLS信道切换、TDLS节能、和TDLS业务指示。TDLS相关操作对应的TDLS帧如下述表1所示。在本申请实施例中，TDLS帧可以包括：TDLS行动帧和TDLS公共行动帧(public action frame)。例如，结合下述表1，TDLS发现响应帧(TDLS Discovery Response frame)属于TDLS公共行动帧，除TDLS Discovery Response frame以外的TDLS帧均属于TDLS行动帧。
应理解，第一STA设备和第二STA设备可以通过交换TDLS帧来实现相应地TDLS相关操作。例如，第一STA设备和第二STA设备可以通过交换TDLS对端节能管理请求帧(TDLS Peer Power Saving Management Request frame，TDLS Peer PSM Request frame)以及TDLS对端节能管理响应帧(TDLS Peer PSM Response frame)实现TDLS节能。或者，第一STA设备或第二STA设备可以采用TDLS帧来实现相应地TDLS相关操作。例如，第一STA设备可以采用TDLS拆除帧(TDLS Teardown frame)实现TDLS拆除。
TDLS帧的传输方式可以包括：通过AP设备(via AP)转发、或直接(direct)传输。其中，通过AP设备转发表示采用这种传输方式的TDLS帧需通过AP转发第一 STA设备和第二STA设备之间的数据。直接传输表示采用这种传输方式的TDLS帧可以通过STA设备与STA设备之间的直连链路由一个STA设备传输至另一个STA设备，不需要AP设备转发。应理解，某些或某个TDLS帧可以采用上述一种或两种(both allowed)方式传输，具体参见下下述表1，此处不再一一阐述。
当TDLS帧通过AP设备转发、或通过直连链路发送的过程中，会被封装成数据帧(data frame)或管理帧(management frame)进行发送。具体地，TDLS行动帧可以被封装成数据帧进行发送，TDLS公共行动帧可以直接以管理帧的形式进行发送，具体参见下述表1，此处不再一一阐述。
表1
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000001
下面对结合图5和图6对本申请下述实施例涉及的AAD和MPDU进行阐述。
如图5所示，AAD可以包括如下一个或多个字段：帧控制(Frame Control)、 地址1(Address1)、地址2(Address2)、地址3(Address3)、序列控制(Sequence Control)、地址4(Address4)、和服务质量控制(Quality of Service Control，QoS Control)。
具体地，地址1用于指示接收地址(receiver address，RA)，地址2用于指示发送地址(transmitter address，TA)，地址3用于指示与接收端关联的AP MLD的地址，或者与接收端关联的AP(指AP MLD中的AP)的地址。对于管理帧，地址3可用于帧过滤。例如，根据地址3可获知该帧是不是属于基本服务集(basic service set，BSS)，如果不是，则会丢弃该帧。
需要说明的是，AAD的具体格式不限于图5所示，例如，AAD中的地址4可以为可选地，本申请对AAD的具体格式不进行限定。
如图6所示，MPDU可以包括如下一个或多个字段：帧控制、时长(Duration)、地址1、地址2、地址3、序列控制、地址4、服务质量控制、高吞吐量控制(high throughput control，HT Control)、密码块链消息验证码协议协议头(cipher-block chaining message authentication code protocol header，CCMP Header)、帧体(Frame Body)、消息完整性校验(message intergrity code，MIC)、和帧校验序列(frame check sequence，FCS)。
具体地，地址1用于指示接收地址，地址2用于指示发送地址，地址3用于指示与接收端关联的AP MLD的地址，或者与接收端关联的AP(指AP MLD中的AP)的地址，或者发送端与接收端之间的链路关联的AP(指AP MLD中的AP)的地址。
如图6所示，MPDU报头可以包括：帧控制、时长、地址1、地址2、地址3、序列控制、地址4、服务质量控制、和高吞吐量控制。发送端会根据AAD和MPDU帧体计算出MIC，并放置到帧体之后，然后再对MPDU帧体和MIC进行加密传输。接收端接收到MPDU后，进行MIC校验，计算出一个MIC，然后对比计算出的MIC与接收到的MIC是否相同，从而知道MPDU是否被篡改。
需要说明的是，MPDU的具体格式不限于图6所示，例如，MPDU中的地址4可以为可选地，本申请对MPDU的具体格式不进行限定。
下面结合表2和表3对legecy STA与AP设备之间的数据帧和管理帧的地址设置进行阐述。AP设备可以包括一个隶属AP。
对于legacy STA与AP设备之间传输的数据帧和管理帧，MPDU报头中的地址1、地址2、地址3和地址4与AAD中的地址1、地址2、地址3和地址4对应保持一致，具体设置如表2和表3所示。
示例性地，数据帧的MPDU报头中的地址1、地址2、地址3和地址4，以及AAD中的地址1、地址2、地址3和地址4如表2所示。表2中，发送至分布式系统(to distributed system，To DS)＝0且和来自分布式系统(From DS)＝0时，表示点对点(Point-to-point，P2P)，也就是直连链路，STA与STA之间进行通信。当To DS＝0且From DS＝1，则表示下行传输，即DS侧向STA发送信息。当To DS＝1且From DS＝0，则表示上行传输，即STA向DS侧发送信息。DA指目的地址(destination address，DA)，SA指源地址(source address，SA)，BSSID指示AP 设备的隶属AP的地址。地址3和地址4的设置分为两种示例：MAC层服务数据单元和短聚合MAC层服务数据单元案例(MAC service data unit and short aggregate MAC service data unit case，MSDU and Short A-MSDU case)、基本A-MSDU和动态A-MSDU案例(Basic A-MSDU and Dynamic A-MSDU case)。
表2
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000002
示例性地，管理帧的MPDU报头中的地址1、地址2、和地址3，以及AAD中的地址1、地址2、和地址3如表3所示。其中，STA MAC Address为legacy STA的地址，BSSID指示AP设备的隶属AP的地址。
表3
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000003
下面结合表4和表5对Non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间的数据帧和管理帧的地址设置进行阐述。Non-AP MLD可以包括多个隶属STA，AP MLD可以包括多个隶属AP。
示例性地，对于Non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间传输的数据帧，AAD中的地址1、地址2、地址3的具体设置如表4所示。对于数据帧，在构建AAD时，地址1、地址2分别设置为相应的设备地址。在MSDU情况下，对于上行数据，地址3设置为目的地址；对于下行数据，地址3设置为源地址。而在A-MSDU情况下，地址3设置为AP MLD的地址。当在空口传输时，MPDU报头中的地址1和地址2分别设置为相应的链路地址，MPDU报头中的地址3的设置与AAD中的地址3相同。
表4
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000004
示例性地，对于Non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间传输的管理帧，AAD中的地址1、地址2、和地址3的具体设置如表5所示。
值得注意的是，在多链路情况下，管理帧可以分为链路级(link-level)管理帧和设备级(MLD-level)管理帧。其中，Link-level管理帧指该管理帧是针对某条具体的链路，例如信道切换请求/响应帧。MLD-level的管理帧是针对整个多链路设备的，例如增加块确认(Add block ACK，ADDBA)帧。
表5
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000005
对于上述管理帧的AAD中的地址1、地址2、和地址3的设置规则以及在空口传输时MPDU报头中的地址1、地址2、和地址3的设置规则如下：对于地址1和地址2，在构建AAD时，地址1和地址2设置为相应MLD的地址；在空口传输时，MPDU Header中的地址1和地址2会替换为相应的链路地址。对于地址3，管理帧为link-level管理帧时，AAD中的A3设置为目的链路对应的隶属(Affiliated)AP地址；在空口传输时，MPDU报头中的A3与AAD中的A3相同。对于MLD-level管理帧，AAD中的A3设置为AP MLD的地址；在空口传输时，MPDU Header中的A3与AAD中的A3相同。
下面将结合图7-图17对本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法进行具体阐述。
示例性地，图7为本申请实施例提供的一种直连链路寻址方法的流程示意图。以第一设备作为TDLS发起端为例进行阐述。该直连链路寻址方法可以适用于图1所示的STA设备与non-AP MLD2之间、或者non-AP MLD1与non-AP MLD2之间的通信。
如图7所示，该直连链路寻址方法包括如下步骤：
S701，第一设备确定被保护数据。
示例性地，第一设备可以包括一个或多个站点STA，第一设备与第三设备连接，第三设备可以包括多个AP。当第一设备包括一个STA时，第一设备可以为图1中示出的STA设备，该STA设备可以称为传统(legacy)STA，为了便于理解，本申请 下述实施例中以legacy STA为例进行阐述。当第一设备包括多个STA时，第一设备可以为图1中示出的non-AP MLD1。第三设备可以为图1中示出的AP MLD。
其中，被保护数据可以包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。
示例性地，被保护数据可以为图5中示出的AAD，第一地址可以为AAD中的地址1，第二地址可以为AAD中的地址2，第三地址可以为AAD中的地址3。
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括一个STA，第一地址为第二设备的地址，第二地址为第一设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备可以包括多个STA，第二设备可以为图1中示出的non-AP MLD2。
示例性地，结合图8，以第一设备为legacy STA，第二设备为non-AP MLD2，第三设备为AP MLD为例。如图8所示，AP MLD包括AP1、AP2、和AP3，legacy STA与AP MLD的AP1连接，non-AP MLD2的STA1和STA2分别与AP MLD的AP1和AP2连接，则如表6所示，第一地址为non-AP MLD2的地址，如non-AP MLD2 MAC Address，第二地址为legacy STA的地址，如legacy STA MAC Address，第三地址为AP1的地址，如AP1的BSSID。
表6
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000006
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括多个STA，第一地址为第二设备的地址，第二地址为第一设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。
表7
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000007
示例性地，结合图9，以第一设备为non-AP MLD1，第二设备为non-AP MLD2，第三设备为AP MLD为例。如图9所示，AP MLD包括AP1、AP2、和AP3，non-AP MLD1的STA1和STA2分别与AP MLD的AP1和AP3连接，non-AP MLD2的STA1和STA2分别与AP MLD的AP1和AP2连接，则如上述表7所示，第一地址为non-AP MLD2的地址，如non-AP MLD2 MAC Address，第二地址为non-AP MLD1的地址，如non-AP MLD1 MAC Address，第三地址为AP MLD的地址，如AP MLD MAC Address。
需要说明的是，图8和图9仅为本申请实施例提供的示例，不对non-AP MLD2包括的STA的数量和AP MLD包括的AP的数量进行限定，不对non-AP MLD2与AP MLD如何连接，以及legacy STA与AP MLD如何连接进行限定。
S702，第一设备发送第一数据单元。相应地，第二设备接收来自第一设备的第一 数据单元。
其中，第一数据单元可以包括第一报头，第一报头是根据被保护数据确定的，第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
示例性地，第一数据单元可以为图6中示出的MPDU，第一报头可以为图6中示出的MPDU报头。
结合图9所示，可以通过第一设备与第二设备之间的链路1传输第一数据单元，不需要通过第二设备转发，从而降低传输时延。
可选地，在上述S702中第一设备发送第一数据单元之前或过程中，可以确定第一数据单元，具体地，可以采用下述方式1至方式4中的一项或多项。
方式1，第一设备确定第一数据单元的第一报头。
可选地，第一报头可以包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
示例性地，第一报头可以为图6中示出的MPDU报头。第四地址可以为MPDU报头中的地址1，第五地址可以为MPDU报头中的地址2，第六地址可以为MPDU报头中的地址3。
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址。
示例性地，结合图8，以第一设备为legacy STA，第二设备为non-AP MLD2，第三设备为AP MLD为例。如图8所示，AP MLD包括AP1、AP2、和AP3，legacy STA与AP MLD的AP1连接，non-AP MLD2的STA1和STA2分别与AP MLD的AP1和AP2连接。当第一设备向第二设备发送第一数据单元时，第一数据单元中地址设置如表8所示，第四地址为non-AP MLD2的地址，如non-AP MLD2 MAC Address，第五地址为legacy STA的地址，如legacy STA MAC Address，第六地址为AP1的地址，如AP1的BSSID。
第一报头的第四地址、第五地址和第六地址可分别与被保护数据的第一地址、第二地址和第三地址相同。
表8
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000008
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第二设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第五地址为第一设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第一直连链路对应的AP的地址，第一直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
示例性地，结合图9和图10，以第一设备为non-AP MLD1，第二设备为non-AP MLD2，第三设备为AP MLD为例。如图9所示，第一设备与第三设备之间建立了链路1-1和链路3，第二设备和第三设备之间建立了链路1-2和链路2。如图10所示non-AP MLD1的STA1与non-AP MLD2的STA1连接，对应直连链路1，当第一设备向第二设备发送第一数据单元时，第一数据单元中地址设置如表9所示，第四地址 为non-AP MLD2的STA1的地址，如Affiliated STA 1 MAC Address of non-AP MLD 2；第五地址为non-AP MLD1的STA1的地址，如Affiliated STA 1 MAC Address of non-AP MLD 1；第六地址为与链路1对应的AP1的地址，如AP MLD的Affiliated AP1 BSSID、或AP MLD的affiliated AP1 MAC address。
需要说明的是，当第一设备和第二设备之间存在多条直连链路时，第一直连链路可以为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路中传输第一数据单元的直连链路。
表9
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000009
方式2，第一设备确定第一数据单元的第一元素。
具体地，第一数据单元可以包括TDLS帧，TDLS帧包括第一元素。第一元素可用于指示目标链路的标识(ID)或者第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址。例如，第一元素可以设置为目标链路对应的BSSID。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS信道切换请求帧或TDLS信道切换响应帧。
假设第三设备包括AP1、AP2和AP3，AP2与目标链路对应，则第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址为第三设备的AP2的地址，即AP MLD的Affiliated AP2 BSSID。
可选地，目标链路为TDLS帧应用的第二直连链路，第二直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
假设第一设备和第二设备之间存在直连链路1和直连链路2，TDLS帧为TDLS信道切换请求帧和TDLS信道切换响应帧，该TDLS信道切换请求/响应帧对应的目标链路为直连链路2，则可根据TDLS信道切换请求/响应帧对应的第一元素，将直连链路2从当前所在信道切换到指定信道上。
在多链路TDLS场景下，通过利用第一元素来指示目标链路，TDLS Channel Switch Request/Response可以通过任意一条直连链路进行传输，不是必须在想要切换的目标链路上传输，可以提高传输灵活性。
可选地，第一元素可以为上述图4中示出的链路标识元素(Link Identifier element)，或者为一个新定义的元素。在一些实施例中，可以采用第一元素中的第一字段指示目标链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址。例如，第一字段可以为Link Identifier element的BSSID字段。
方式3，第一设备确定第一数据单元的第二元素。
具体地，第一数据单元可以包括TDLS帧，TDLS帧可以包括唤醒调度元素和第二元素。唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于第三直连链路的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，第二元素用于指示第三直连链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与第三直连链路对应的AP的地址，第三直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
假设第一设备和第二设备之间存在直连链路1和直连链路2，第三设备包括AP1、AP2和AP3，直连链路1对应AP1，直连链路2对应AP2，唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于直连链路2的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，则第二元素用于指示直连链路2的标识或者第三设备的AP2的地址，如AP MLD的Affiliated AP2 BSSID。
AP MLD的不同隶属AP可以具有独立的定时同步功能(timing synchronization function，TSF)，如此，通过第二元素指示的标识或地址，可以获得唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于哪条直连链路的TSF。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS对端节能管理请求帧和TDLS对端节能管理响应帧。
如此，当TDLS发起端和响应端交换TDLS对端节能管理请求帧和TDLS对端节能管理响应帧后，可以根据TDLS对端节能管理请求帧和/或TDLS对端节能管理响应帧中携带的唤醒调度元素周期性地唤醒并收发数据，从而可以节省功耗。另外，通过指示偏移量字段相对的第三直连链路，可以实现在多链路TDLS场景下TDLS Peer PSM Request/Response通过任意一条直连链路进行传输，且端能正确解析唤醒调度元素，可以提高传输灵活性。
可选地，第二元素可以为上述图4中示出的链路标识元素(Link Identifier element)，或者为一个新定义的元素。在一些实施例中，可以采用第二元素中的第一字段指示第三直连链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与第三直连链路对应的AP的地址。例如，第一字段可以为Link Identifier element的BSSID字段。
可选地，唤醒调度元素可以复用现有的唤醒调度元素，或者为一个新定义的元素。
示例性地，结合图11，唤醒调度元素(Wakeup Schedule element)可以包括如下一个或多个字段：Element ID、Length、偏移量(Offset)、间隔(interval)、唤醒窗口时隙(Awake window Slots)、最大唤醒窗口持续时间(Maximum Awake Window Duration)、和空闲数(Idle Count)。
其中，偏移量字段可用于指示第一个唤醒窗口相对于TSF0的偏移量，TSF可以是一个计数器，该计数器存储的数值表示时间数值。间隔字段可用于指示两个相邻的唤醒窗口之间的时间间隔。唤醒窗口时隙字段用于指示唤醒窗口的持续时间。最大唤醒窗口持续时间字段用于指示唤醒窗口的最大持续时间。空闲数字段用于指示TDLS对端删除周期性醒来调度前，允许经历的空闲唤醒窗口的个数。空闲唤醒窗口是指在该唤醒窗口没有收到来自TDLS对端的单播帧。例如，若第一设备经历空闲数字段指示的数量的唤醒窗口的过程中，一直未收到来自第二设备的单播帧，则第二设备可将唤醒调度元素删除。
需要说明的是，方式2和方式3可以独立使用，或结合使用，在结合使用时，第一元素和第二元素可以为同一元素，如第一元素，从而第一元素可用于指示目标链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址，且可用于指示第三直连链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与第三直连链路对应的AP的地址。也就是说，目标链路和第三直连链路为同一条直连链路。
下面针对不同的TDLS帧结合表10对上述链路标识元素，或者为一个新定义的元素设置方式进行阐述。也就是说，当TDLS帧为不同的帧时，链路标识元素，或者为一个新定义的元素，或者链路标识元素中的BSSID字段，或者新定义的元素的第一字段可能对应不同的设置内容。为了便于描述，下面将链路标识元素、新定义的元素、第一元素、第二元素统称为第一元素。
在一些场景中，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素用于指示传输链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输链路对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。例如，第一元素可以设置为传输链路对应的BSSID。
当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输链路对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。
表10
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000011
也就是说，TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧对应的第一元素的设置内容可以与TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧对应的第一元素的设置内容相同。例如，第一元素可以设置为TDLS发现请求帧的传输链路对应的BSSID。
当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素用于指示第一设备与第三设备之间的链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备对应的AP的地址，传输链路为发送TDLS发现请求帧的链路。例如，第一元素可以设置为Legacy STA所在链路对应的BSSID。
当第一设备包括一个STA，TDLS帧为TDLS建立响应帧、TDLS建立确认帧、TDLS拆除帧、TDLS信道切换请求帧、TDLS信道切换响应帧、TDLS对端节能管理请求帧、TDLS对端节能管理响应帧、TDLS对端流量指示帧或TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素的具体实现方式可参照上述当第一设备包括一个STA且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧时，第一元素的实现方式，此处不再赘述。
在另一些场景中，当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。可选地，参考链路可以为Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路。例如，第一元素可以设置为参考链路对应的BSSID。
当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现响应帧时，第一元素用于指示传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与传输TDLS发现响应帧的公共链路对应的AP的地址。其中，公共链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，公共链路对应的第一设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP与公共链路对应的第二设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP相同。
可选地，当第一设备包括多个STA时，可以在任意一条公共链路上传输TDLS发现响应帧。
当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS建立请求帧、TDLS建立响应帧或TDLS建立确认帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。例如，第一元素可以设置为参考链路对应的BSSID。
当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS拆除帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址，则可以表示拆除第一设备与第二设备之间的所有直连链路。例如，第一元素可以设置为AP MLD的MAC地址。或者，第一元素用于指示第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备和第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址。例如，某条直连链路对应的BSSID。示例性地，当第一元素设置为第一设备和第二设备之间某条直连链路对应affilaited AP的地址时，则表示拆除该直连链路，即后续不能再通过该直连链路收发数据。
当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS信道切换请求帧、或者TDLS信道切换响应帧时，第一元素的具体实现方式可参照上述方式2，此处不再赘述。例如，第一元素可以设置为目标链路对应的BSSID。
当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS对端节能管理请求帧、或者TDLS对端节能管理响应帧时，第一元素的具体实现方式可参照上述方式3，此处不再赘述。例如，第一元素可以设置成唤醒调度元素对应的第三直连链路的BSSID。
当第一设备包括多个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS对端流量指示帧、或者TDLS对端流量响应帧时，第一元素用于指示第三设备的地址。例如，第一元素可以设置为AP MLD的MAC地址。
下面对参考链路、传输链路以及公共链路进行具体阐述。
参考链路(Reference Link)：MPDU的帧体携带有Multi-link element时，则Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路称为参考链路。例如，MPDU的具体格式可以参照图6所示，Multi-link element的具体格式可以参照图3或图12所示，Link Identifier Element的具体格式可以参照图4所示。
具体地，对于多链路TDLS的建立，当第一设备包括多个STA时，则可能需要在以下TDLS行动帧中携带Multi-link element，如TDLS Setup Request/Response,TDLS Discovery Request/Response。TDLS发起端和响应端成功交换TDLS Discovery Request/Response帧后，non-AP MLD会知道对端是不是MLD。如果当TDLS发起端和响应端都是MLD时，可以在随后的TDLS Setup Request/Response帧中携带Multi-link element。
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种Multi-link element的帧结构示意图。如图12所示，Type子字段设置为TDLS所对应的编号。透明传输/非透明传输(Transparent/non-transparent)比特指示non-AP MLD所采用的地址模式。当地址模式为Transparent时，表示non-AP MLD的链路地址与non-AP MLD地址相同；当地址模式为non-transparent时，表示non-AP MLD对应的不同链路使用不同的链路地址，且non-APMLD地址与non-AP MLD的链路地址不同。这时，需要在每个Per-STA Profile的开始处指示对应的链路ID和affiliated STA所使用的地址，即链路地址。MLD MAC Address字段始终设置为AP MLD的MAC地址。
帧体的具体格式可参照图13所示。帧体可以包括参考链路的信息(如Element ID#1、Element ID#2等)和其他链路的信息(Multi-link element)。例如，结合图3或图12，其他链路的信息可携带在Multi-link element中的Per-STA Profile中。
传输链路(Transmitting Link)：是指该帧是在哪条链路上发送的，对应的链路就称为传输链路。假设在链路1上发送TDLS帧，则链路1称为传输链路。
对于被封装成管理帧直接传输的TDLS帧(例如TDLS Discovery Response)，传输链路即为参考链路。具体地，在发送管理帧时，通常要求传输链路和参考链路保持一致。比如，发起端在链路1上发送多链路关联请求帧，那么响应端也需要在链路1上回多链路关联响应帧。
对于封装成数据帧的TDLS帧，传输链路与参考链路可能不相同。具体地，在发送数据帧时，传输链路可以为任意一条链路，也就是说，可以在任意一条链路上发送数据帧，从而传输链路与参考链路可能相同，或者不相同。
示例性地，发送数据帧的方式可以包括：一种可能是按照管理帧发送要求发送数据帧，即在哪条链路上发，就在哪条链路上回。同时Transmitting link和reference link保持一致。另外一种可能性是按照数据帧的发送要求，即在任意一条链路上发。例如TDLS Setup Request在link 1上发，而TDLS Setup Response在link 2上回。这时，也不要求Transmitting link和reference link保持一致。
公共链路(Common Link)：与同一个隶属AP关联的两个STA(STA指legacy STA或non-AP MLD的隶属STA)对应的直连链路可称为公共链路。对于(legacy STA,MLD)场景，legacy STA所关联的链路即为公共链路。对于(non-AP MLD1，non-AP MLD2)场景，可能存在多条common Link。
例如，假设AP MLD对应有链路1、链路2和链路3，non-AP MLD1与AP MLD之间建立了链路1和链路2，non-AP MLD2与AP MLD之间建立了链路1和链路3。其中，non-AP MLD1的STA1和non-AP MLD2的STA1均与AP MLD的AP1关联，对应链路1。non-AP MLD1的STA2与AP MLD的AP2关联，对应链路2。non-AP MLD2的STA3与AP MLD的AP3关联，对应链路3。建立直连链路1和直连链路2，并且non-AP MLD1的STA1与non-AP MLD2的STA1对应直连链路1，non-AP MLD1的STA2与non-AP MLD2的STA3对应直连链路2，则直连链路1可称为公共链路。
方式4，第一设备确定第一数据单元的第三元素。
可选地，第一数据单元可以包括第三元素，第三元素可以用于指示在第一链路上建立至少一条第四直连链路。第一链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，第一链路可以包括至少一条第四直连链路。
也是就说，第一链路可以为第一设备与第三设备、第二设备与第三设备之间的公共链路，第一链路对应的第一设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP与第一链路对应的第二设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP相同。如此，第一设备与第二设备可以在公共链路上建立直连链路，以提高数据传输速率。
在一些实施例中，第三元素可以包括直连链路数量字段和直连链路标识符字段。其中，直连链路数量字段可用于指示请求建立的第四直连链路的数量。如此，通过指 示建立第四直连链路的数量，可以实现在第一链路的部分或全部链路上建立第四直连链路，提高直连链路建立的灵活性。
具体地，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中分别与至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址、或者至少一条第四直连链路的标识。换句话说，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中分别与至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的BSSID、或者至少一条第四直连链路的link ID。如此，可以指示在哪些链路上建立直连链路。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中“AP的MAC地址”、“AP的BSSID”、和“AP的地址”，在不强调其区别时，可以表达相同的含义。
或者，可选地，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第一设备的第一STA的地址和第二设备的第二STA的地址。也就是说，直连链路标识符字段可以包括直连链路两端的隶属STA的地址，如第一STA的MAC地址、第二STA的MAC地址。
或者，可选地，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中分别与至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址、或者至少一条第四直连链路的标识，以及第一设备的第一STA的地址和第二设备的第二STA的地址。
方式4中的上述第三元素是以在公共链路上建立直连链路的场景进行阐述的，在一种可能的设计方案中，第一设备和第二设备之间可以在非公共链路上建立直连链路。当在非公共链路上建立直连链路时，第三元素的实现的方式与在公共链路上建立直连链路的场景对应的第三元素的具体实现方式类似。
示例性地，第三元素可以用于指示在第二链路上建立至少一条第五直连链路。第二链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的不相同的链路，第二链路可以包括至少一条第五直连链路。
也是就说，第二链路可以为第一设备与第三设备、第二设备与第三设备之间的非公共链路，第二链路对应的第一设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP与第二链路对应的第二设备的STA关联的第三设备的AP不相同。如此，第一设备与第二设备可以在非公共链路上建立直连链路，以提高数据传输速率。
在一些实施例中，第三元素可以包括直连链路数量字段和直连链路标识符字段。其中，直连链路数量字段可用于指示请求建立的第五直连链路的数量。如此，通过指示建立第五直连链路的数量，可以实现在第二链路的部分或全部链路上建立第五直连链路，提高直连链路建立的灵活性。
具体地，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中分别与至少一条第五直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址、或者至少一条第五直连链路的标识。例如，第五直连链路的一端对应的第一设备的STA，另一端对应第二设备的STA，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备的STA对应的AP的地址，或者第三设备的多个AP中与第二设备的STA对应的AP的地址。
也就是说，直连链路标识符字段可以包括第五直连链路的两端中任意一端对应的隶属AP的BSSID或者隶属AP的对应的第二链路的标识。
或者，可以采用建立直连链路的发起端对应的隶属AP的地址或隶属AP对应的第二链路的标识来表示非直连链路。例如，当发起直连链路建立的为第一设备时，直 连链路标识符字段可以包括第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备的STA对应的AP的地址、或者隶属AP对应的第二链路的标识。
在一些实施例中，第三元素可以为TDLS链路信息元素(TDLS Link Info element)。如图14所示，TDLS链路信息元素可以包括如下一个或多个字段：Element ID、Length、直连链路数量(Number of Direct links)、直连链路标识符(Direct link Identifier)。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例不对第三元素的格式进行限定，图14仅为本申请的一个示例。
需要说明的是，上述方式1至方式4不仅可以与上述图7所示的直连链路寻址方法结合使用，上述方式1至方式4之间还可以单独使用，或者互相结合使用，本申请对此不进行限定。
在一些实施例中，第七地址与TPK绑定。
可选地，第七地址包括第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备和第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址或者第三设备的所有AP的地址、以及第三设备的地址。
也就是说，可以将直连链路对应的隶属AP的地址(如隶属AP的BSSID)和第三设备的地址与TPK绑定，或者，第三设备的所有隶属AP的地址(如所有隶属AP的BSSID)和第三设备的地址与TPK绑定。
可选地，当第一设备包括多个STA时，第一设备和第二设备之间可以协商在部分或全部链路上建立直连链路，从而将建立的直连链路对应的隶属AP的地址和第三设备的地址与TPK绑定，或者将第三设备的所有隶属AP的地址和第三设备的地址与TPK绑定，可以第一设备与第二设备之间通过直连链路通信的安全性。
在一些实施例中，本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括下述步骤一至步骤二所示的TPK派生过程。需要说明的是，步骤一至步骤二可以单独使用，或者与图7所示的方法、方式1、方式2、方式3和/或方式3结合使用。
步骤一，第一设备与第二设备协商确定认证和秘钥管理(authentication and key management，AKM)套件选择器。
例如，如表11所示，AKM套件选择器可以包括如下一项或多项：组织唯一标识符(organizationally unique identifier，OUI)、套件类型(suite type)、认证(authentication)、秘钥管理(key management)、秘钥派生(key derivation)、认证号码(authentication numbers)。各项具体对应内容详见表11，此处不再赘述。
表11
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000012
步骤二，第一设备与第二设备协商派生TDLS对等秘钥TPK。
可选地，可以采用下述公式(1)和公式(2)确定TPK。
TPK-Key-Input＝Hash(min(SNonce,ANonce)||max(SNonce,ANonce))    (1)
在上述公式(1)中，Hash表示哈希算法，SNonce(supplicant nonce)表示请求者的随机数，ANonce(authenticator nonce)表示认证者的随机数，||表示拼接或者包含，数学符号min表示取最小值，数学符号max表示取最大值。
TPK＝KDF-Hash-Length(TPK-Key-Input,“TDLS MLD PMK”,min(MAC_I,MAC_R)||max(MAC_I,MAC_R)||AP MLD MAC Address||Affiliated AP Address1||….Affiliated AP Addressn)        (2)
在上述公式(2)中，TPK表示TDLS对等秘钥，KDF-Hash-lenrth表示秘钥派生函数，“TDLS MLD PMK”表示TDLS MLD成对主密钥(pairwise master key，PMK)，||表示拼接或者包含，数学符号min表示取最小值，数学符号max表示取最大值，AP MLD MAC Address表示第三设备(AP MLD)的地址，Affiliated AP Address1表示第一设备和第二设备之间的直连链路对应的隶属AP(第三设备的AP)的地址，当第一设备为发起端时，MAC_I表示第一设备的MAC地址，MAC_R表示第二设备的MAC地址。
需要说明的是，上述步骤一至步骤二同样可以应用到成对主密钥(pairwise master key，PTK)的派生，第七地址可以与PTK绑定，此处不再详细赘述。
在一些实施例中，第一设备与第二设备可以通过交换TDLS Setup Request/Response/Confirm(具体见下述步骤a-步骤c)来完成TPK派生的握手协商，即可将上述步骤一至步骤二可以与下述步骤a-步骤c结合使用，完成TPK派生的握手协商。
以第一设备作为TDLS发起端为例。
步骤a，第一设备向第二设备发送TDLS Setup Request帧。相应地，第二设备接收来自第一设备的TDLS Setup Request帧。
步骤b，第二设备向第一设备发送TDLS Setup Response帧。相应地，第一设备接收来自第二设备的TDLS Setup Response帧。
可选地，第二设备可以根据Link Identifier element和/或TDLS Link Info element向第一设备发送TDLS Setup Response帧。
例如，TDLS Setup Response帧可以包括接受TDLS建立请求、或不接受TDLS建立请求，如在TDLS Setup Response帧的状态码(Status Code)显示接受或不接受。
步骤c，若TDLS Setup Response帧指示接受(Accept)，则第一设备向第二设备发送TDLS Setup Confirm帧，从而完成TPK派生的握手协商。
基于图7所述的直连链路寻址方法，当第一设备包括一个STA，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第一设备连接的第一AP的地址构建被保护数据。第一设备包括多个STA时，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第三设备的地址构建被保护数据。从而第一设备可以通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输第一数据单元，可以提高数据传输速率。另外，第一设备包括多个STA时，采用设备地址构建被保护数据，直连链路的变化，不影响被保护数据，从而在多条直连链路之间跨链路传输数据时，不需要重新进行加密，可以进一步提高数据传输速率。
示例性地，图15为本申请实施例提供的另一种直连链路寻址方法的流程示意图。以第二设备作为TDLS发起端为例进行阐述。该直连链路寻址方法可以适用于图1所示的STA设备与non-AP MLD2之间、或者non-AP MLD1与non-AP MLD2之间 的通信。
S1501，第二设备确定被保护数据。
其中，被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括一个STA，第一地址为第一设备的地址，第二地址为第二设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。
结合图8，当第一设备包括一个STA，第二设备作为TDLS发起端时，被保护数据的第一地址、第二地址和第三地址如表12所示。与上述S701中表6的区别在于，第一地址和第二地址的设置内容互换，响应端为第一设备，从而第一地址为legacy STA的地址，如legacy STA MAC Address；发起端为第二设备，从而第二地址为non-AP MLD2的地址，如non-AP MLD2 MAC Address。第三地址与上述表6中的第三地址相同，第三地址为AP1的地址，如AP1的BSSID。
表12
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000013
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括多个STA，第一地址为第一设备的地址，第二地址为第二设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。
结合图9，当第一设备包括多个STA，第二设备作为TDLS发起端时，被保护数据的第一地址、第二地址和第三地址如表13所示。由于发起端和响应端发生改变，表13与上述S701中表7的区别在于，第一地址和第二地址的设置内容互换，具体见表13，此处不再赘述。
表13
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000014
S1502，第二设备发送第一数据单元。
其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头是根据被保护数据确定的，第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
示例性地，第一数据单元可以为图6中示出的MPDU，第一报头可以为图6中示出的MPDU报头。
可选地，在上述S702中第一设备发送第一数据单元之前或过程中，可以确定第一数据单元，具体地，可以采用下述方式5至方式8中的一项或多项。
方式5，第二设备确定第一数据单元的第一报头。
可选地，第一报头可以包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
示例性地，第一报头可以为图6中示出的MPDU报头。第四地址可以为MPDU报头中的地址1，第五地址可以为MPDU报头中的地址2，第六地址可以为MPDU报头中的地址3。
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址。
结合图8，当第一设备包括一个STA，第二设备作为TDLS发起端时，MPDU报头的第四地址、第五地址和第六地址如表14所示。由于发起端和响应端发生改变，表14与上述方式1中表8的区别在于，第四地址和第五地址的设置内容互换，具体见表14，此处不再赘述。
表14
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000015
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第一设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第五地址为第二设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第一直连链路对应的AP的地址，第一直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
结合图9和图10，当第一设备包括多个STA，第二设备作为TDLS发起端时，MPDU报头的第四地址、第五地址和第六地址如表15所示。由于发起端和响应端发生改变，表15与上述方式1中表9的区别在于，第四地址和第五地址的设置内容互换，具体见表15，此处不再赘述。
需要说明的是，当第一设备和第二设备之间存在多条直连链路时，第一直连链路可以为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路中传输第一数据单元的直连链路。
表15
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000016
方式6，第二设备确定第一数据单元的第一元素。
在一些实施例中，第一数据单元可以包括TDLS帧，TDLS帧包括第一元素。第一元素用于指示目标链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与目标链路对应的AP的地址。例如，第一元素可以设置为目标链路对应的BSSID。
可选地，目标链路为TDLS帧应用的第二直连链路，第二直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。
关于方式6、TDLS帧、以及第一元素的具体实现方式可参照上述方式2，此处不再赘述。
方式7，第二设备确定第一数据单元的第二元素。
在一些实施例中，第一数据单元可以包括TDLS帧，TDLS帧可以包括唤醒调度元素和第二元素。唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于第三直连链路的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，第二元素可用于指示第三直连链路的标识或者第三设备的多个AP中与第三直连链路对应的AP的地址，第三直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路。具体实现方式可参照上述方式3中对应的实现方式，此处不再赘述。
需要说明的是，与方式2和方式3类似，方式6和方式7可以独立使用，或结合使用，此处不再赘述。
表16
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000018
下面针对不同的TDLS帧结合上述表16对上述链路标识元素，或者为一个新定义的元素设置方式进行阐述。也就是说，当TDLS帧为不同的帧时，链路标识元素，或者为一个新定义的元素，或者链路标识元素中的BSSID字段，或者新定义的元素的第一字段可能对应不同的设置内容。为了便于描述，下面将链路标识元素、新定义的元素、第一元素、第二元素统称为第一元素。
第二设备作为TDLS发起端时，第一元素设置方式，与第一设备作为TDLS发起端时，第一元素设置方式的主要区别在于第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧的场景中。
示例性地，当第一设备包括一个STA，且TDLS帧为TDLS发现请求帧时，第一元素用于指示参考链路的标识、或者第三设备的多个AP中与参考链路对应的AP的地址。其中，参考链路可以为Link Identifier Element中的BSSID字段所指示的链路。例如，第一元素可以设置为参考链路对应的BSSID。
表16所示的其他场景中，第一元素的具体实现方式，可参照上述表10中第一设备作为TDLS发起端时，对应的第一元素的实现方式，此处不再赘述。
关于参考链路、传输链路以及公共链路的具体实现方式可参照上述方式3中相应的实现方式，此处不再赘述。
方式8，第二设备确定第一数据单元的第三元素。
可选地，第一数据单元可以包括第三元素，第三元素可用于指示在第一链路上建立至少一条第四直连链路，第一链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，第一链路包括至少一条第四直连链路。具体实现方式可参照上述方式4中对应的实现方式，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计方案中，第一设备和第二设备之间可以在非公共链路上建立直连链路。当在非公共链路上建立直连链路时，第三元素的实现的方式与在公共链路上建立直连链路的场景对应的第三元素的具体实现方式类似。
示例性地，第三元素可以用于指示在第二链路上建立至少一条第五直连链路。第二链路为第一设备与第三设备之间的链路、第二设备与第三设备之间的链路的不相同的链路，第二链路可以包括至少一条第五直连链路。如此，第一设备与第二设备可以在非公共链路上建立直连链路，以提高数据传输速率。具体实现方式可参照上述方式4中对应的实现方式，此处不再赘述。
需要说明的是，上述方式5至方式8不仅可以与上述图15所示的直连链路寻址方法结合使用，上述方式5至方式8之间还可以单独使用，或者互相结合使用，本申 请对此不进行限定。
在一些实施例中，第七地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定。可选地第七地址可以包括第三设备的多个AP中与第一设备和第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址或者第三设备的所有AP的地址、以及第三设备的地址。具体实现方式可参照上述第一设备将第七地址与TPK绑定，此处不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计方案中，本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法，还可以包括下述步骤三至步骤四所示的TPK派生过程。需要说明的是，步骤三至步骤四可以单独使用，或者与图15所示的方法、方式5、方式6、方式7、和/或方式8结合使用。
步骤三，第一设备与第二设备协商确定认证和AKM套件选择器。具体实现方式可参照上述步骤一，此处不再赘述。
步骤四，第一设备与第二设备协商派生TDLS对等秘钥TPK。具体实现方式可参照上述步骤二，此处不再赘述。
需要说明的是，上述步骤三至步骤四同样可以应用到成对主密钥(pairwise master key，PTK)的派生，第七地址可以与PTK绑定，此处不再详细赘述。
在一些实施例中，第一设备与第二设备可以通过交换TDLS Setup Request/Response/Confirm(具体见下述步骤d-步骤f)来完成TPK派生的握手协商，即可将上述步骤三至步骤四可以与下述步骤d-步骤f结合使用，完成TPK派生的握手协商。
以第二设备作为TDLS发起端为例。
步骤d-步骤f与上述步骤a-步骤c类似，步骤d-步骤f分别对应上述步骤a-步骤c，主要区别在于将上述步骤a-步骤c中的第一设备替换为第二设备，将第二设备替换为第一设备，此处不再赘述。
基于图15所述的直连链路寻址方法，当第一设备包括一个STA，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第一设备连接的第一AP的地址构建被保护数据。第一设备包括多个STA时，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第三设备的地址构建被保护数据。从而第一设备可以通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输第一数据单元，不需要第三设备的转发，可以提高数据传输速率。另外，第一设备包括多个STA时，采用设备地址构建被保护数据，直连链路的变化，不影响被保护数据，从而在多条直连链路之间跨链路传输数据时，不需要重新进行加密，可以进一步提高数据传输速率。
示例性地，图16为本申请实施例提供的又一种直连链路寻址方法的流程示意图。以第一设备作为TDLS发起端为例进行阐述。该直连链路寻址方法可以适用于图1所示的STA设备与non-AP MLD2之间、或者non-AP MLD1与non-AP MLD2之间的通信。
S1601，第一设备确定第一数据单元。
其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
在一些实施例中，第一数据单元可以包括帧体，例如，帧体可以为TDLS帧或者数据。
示例性地，第一数据单元可以为图6中示出的MPDU，第一报头可以为图6中示 出的MPDU报头，TDLS帧或数据携带在Frame Body字段中。
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。
结合图8，第一AP为图8中的AP1，当第一设备包括一个STA，第一设备作为TDLS发起端时，MPDU报头的第四地址、第五地址和第六地址如表17所示，第四地址为non-AP MLD2的地址，如non-AP MLD2 MAC Address，第五地址为legacy STA的地址，如legacy STA MAC Address，第六地址为AP1的地址，如AP1的BSSID。
表17
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000019
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间传输第一数据单元的链路。第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
示例性地，结合图9和图10，以第一设备为non-AP MLD1，第二设备为non-AP MLD2，第三设备为AP MLD为例。当第一设备包括多个STA，第一设备作为TDLS发起端时，MPDU报头的第四地址、第五地址和第六地址如表18所示，假设在直连链路1上传输第一数据单元，则第四地址为non-AP MLD2的STA1的地址，如non-AP MLD2 MAC Address；第五地址为non-AP MLD1的STA1的地址，如non-AP MLD1 MAC Address；第六地址为与直连链路1对应的AP1的地址，如AP MLD的Affiliated AP1 BSSID。
表18
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000020
具体地，表17和表18对应的第六地址的设置方式，可以兼容第一设备包括一个STA和第一设备包括多个STA的情况，以避免频繁修改第六地址的设置内容，从而可以降低传输时延。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
上述17和表18可以为管理帧的第一报头的地址设置方式，由于TDLS发现响应帧被封装成公共管理帧，不需要加密，因而可以不确定对应的AAD构造。
S1602，第一设备发送第一数据单元。相应地，第二设备接收来自第一设备的第一数据单元。
基于图16所述的直连链路寻址方法，当第一设备包括一个STA，采用第一设备 的地址、第二设备的地址以及第一设备连接的第一AP的地址构建第一报头。第一设备包括多个STA时，采用第一设备的地址、第二设备的地址以及第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址构建第一报头，第六直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间传输第一数据单元的链路。从而第一设备可以通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输第一数据单元，不需要第三设备的转发，可以提高数据传输速率。另外，第六地址的设置方式可以兼容第一设备包括一个STA和第一设备包括多个STA的情况，可以避免频繁修改第六地址的设置内容，从而可以进一步降低传输时延。
示例性地，图17为本申请实施例提供的又一种直连链路寻址方法的流程示意图。以第二设备作为TDLS发起端为例进行阐述。该直连链路寻址方法可以适用于图1所示的STA设备与non-AP MLD2之间、或者non-AP MLD1与non-AP MLD2之间的通信。
S1701，第二设备确定第一数据单元。
其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
在一些实施例中，第一数据单元可以包括帧体，例如，帧体可以为TDLS帧或者数据。
示例性地，第一数据单元可以为图6中示出的MPDU，第一报头可以为图6中示出的MPDU报头，TDLS帧或数据携带在Frame Body字段中。
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。
结合图8，当第一设备包括一个STA，第二设备作为TDLS发起端时，MPDU报头的第四地址、第五地址和第六地址如表19所示。由于发起端和响应端发生改变，表19与上述S1601中表17的区别在于，第四地址和第五地址的设置内容互换，具体见表19，此处不再赘述。
表19
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000021
在一些实施例中，当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为第一设备与第二设备之间传输第一数据单元的链路。第一数据单元是通过第一设备与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
结合图9和图10，当第一设备包括多个STA，第二设备作为TDLS发起端时，MPDU报头的第四地址、第五地址和第六地址如表20所示。由于发起端和响应端发生改变，表20与上述S1601中表18的区别在于，第四地址和第五地址的设置内容互换，具体见表20，此处不再赘述。
表20
Figure PCTCN2022078704-appb-000022
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
S1702，第二设备发送第一数据单元。相应地，第一设备接收来自第二设备的第一数据单元。
需要说明的是，图17所示方法的技术效果可参照上述图16所述方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中提供的第一数据单元(例如MPDU)和被保护数据(例如AAD)构造的地址设置规则适用于单播帧。
下面介绍本申请实施例适用的几种特殊的应用场景，应理解，本申请实施例的应用场景不仅限于下述几种应用场景。
场景一
假设AP MLD对应有3条链路(link)，分别为link 1，link 2和link 3。而non-AP MLD 1与AP MLD之间建立了两条link，分别为link 1和link 2；而Non-AP MLD 2则与AP MLD之间建立了link 1和Link 3。这时，non-AP MLD 1和non-AP MLD 2可以建立多链路TDLS。其中，link 1被称之为公共链路，而另外一条链路则称之为非公共链路，其对应的链路标识可以用该链路两端的任意一端所关联的AP的Link ID或者BSSID来指示。对于非公共链路上的数据传输，非公共链路的两端可以通过公共链路协商在哪条信道上传输。比如当非公共链路切换到某一端所在的信道上传输时，则对端相当于是非基本通道(off-channel)传输，其需要通知AP其进入休眠(Doze)状态，然后再切换到另一端所在的信道上进行直连传输。
从上述场景来看，non-AP MLD之间建立直连链路，必须存在至少一条公共链路。否则不允许回TDLS Discovery Response，更不允许发起TDLS Setup。当Non-AP MLD之间存在多条公共链路时，TDLS Discovery Response可以在任意一条公共链路上回复，但当Link Identifier element中BSSID字段所对应的link也为公共链路时，则可以优先在该公共链路上回复。
此外，还允许两端的non-AP MLD使用不同的地址模式，如透明传输模式、非透明传输模式。
场景二
假设AP MLD对应有3条link，分别为link 1，link 2和link 3。而non-AP MLD 1与AP MLD之间建立了两条link，分别为link 1和link 2；而legacy STA关联在link 2上。若Non-AP MLD作为发起端发送TDLS Discovery Request帧，其携带的Link Identifier element中的BSSID设置为link 1所对应的BSSID，那么Legacy STA在收到TDLS Discovery Request帧后，发现Link Identifier element中的BSSID与自己所在的BSSID不一致，则legacy STA不会在Link 2上回TDLS Discovery Response帧，从而导致发现失败。之所以会出现该情况是因为Non-AP MLD不知道对端是legacy STA还是non-AP MLD，也不知道对端关联在哪个隶属AP下。
为了避免这种情况，non-AP MLD可以再发送一个TDLS Discovery Request帧，其中所携带的Link Identifier element中的BSSID则设置为Link 2所对应的BSSID，这样当Legacy STA在收到TDLS Discovery Request帧后，发现Link Identifier element中的BSSID与自己所在的BSSID一致，则会在Link 2上回一个TDLS Discovery Response帧，从而发现成功。
场景三
假设AP MLD对应有3条link，分别为link 1，link 2和link 3。non-AP MLD 1与AP MLD之间建立了两条link，分别为link 1和link 2；legacy STA关联在link 2上。若Legacy STA作为发起端在link 2上发送TDLS Discovery Request帧，当Non-AP MLD收到TDLS Discovery Request帧后，其只能在Link Identifier element中BSSID所指示的链路(即link 2)上回TDLS Discovery Response帧。
当TDLS发起端和响应端都为MLD时，分别在TDLS Discovery Request和TDLS Discovery Response帧里携带Multi-link element。这样，通过TDLS发现过程两端都知道对端也是MLD设备类型。而且通过TDLS发现过程，TDLS发起端和响应端可以知道哪些链路是公共链路。
以上结合图7-图17详细说明了本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法。以下结合图18-图19详细说明本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址装置。
图18为可用于执行本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法的一种直连链路寻址装置的结构示意图。直连链路寻址装置1800可以是第一设备或第二设备，也可以是应用于第一设备或第二设备中的芯片或者其他具有相应功能的部件。如图18所示，直连链路寻址装置1800可以包括处理器1801和收发器1803。还可以包括存储器1802。其中，处理器1801与存储器1802和收发器1803耦合，如可以通过通信总线连接，处理器1801也可以单独使用。
下面结合图18对直连链路寻址装置1800的各个构成部件进行具体的介绍：
处理器1801是直连链路寻址装置1800的控制中心，可以是一个处理器，也可以是多个处理元件的统称。例如，处理器1801是一个或多个中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)，也可以是特定集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，或者是被配置成实施本申请实施例的一个或多个集成电路，例如：一个或多个微处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，或，一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)。
其中，处理器1801可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器1802内的软件程序，以及调用存储在存储器1802内的数据，执行直连链路寻址装置1800的各种功能。
在具体的实现中，作为一种实施例，处理器1801可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图18中所示的CPU0和CPU1。
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，直连链路寻址装置1800也可以包括多个处理器，例如图18中所示的处理器1801和处理器1804。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核处理器(single-CPU)，也可以是一个多核处理器(multi-CPU)。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个通信设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。
存储器1802可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息 和指令的其他类型的静态存储通信设备，随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储通信设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储通信设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。存储器1802可以和处理器1801集成在一起，也可以独立存在，并通过直连链路寻址装置1800的输入/输出端口(图18中未示出)与处理器1801耦合，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
其中，所述存储器1802用于存储执行本申请方案的软件程序，并由处理器1801来控制执行。上述具体实现方式可以参考下述方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
收发器1803，用于与其他直连链路寻址装置之间的通信。例如，直连链路寻址装置1800为第一设备时，收发器1803可以用于与第二设备、第三设备通信。又例如，直连链路寻址装置1800为第二设备时，收发器1803可以用于与第一设备、第三设备通信。此外，收发器1803可以包括接收器和发送器(图18中未单独示出)。其中，接收器用于实现接收功能，发送器用于实现发送功能。收发器1803可以和处理器1801集成在一起，也可以独立存在，并通过直连链路寻址装置1800的输入/输出端口(图18中未示出)与处理器1801耦合，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
需要说明的是，图18中示出的直连链路寻址装置1800的结构并不构成对该直连链路寻址装置的限定，实际的直连链路寻址装置可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。
其中，上述步骤S701-S702和S1601-S1602中第一设备的动作可以由图18所示的直连链路寻址装置1800中的处理器1801调用存储器1802中存储的应用程序代码以指令远端终端设备执行。
上述步骤S1501-S1502和S1701-S1702中第二设备的动作可以由图18所示的直连链路寻址装置1800中的处理器1801调用存储器1802中存储的应用程序代码以指令远端终端设备执行，本实施例对此不作任何限制。
图19为本申请实施例提供的另一种直连链路寻址装置的结构示意图。为了便于说明，图19仅示出了该直连链路寻址装置的主要部件。
该直连链路寻址装置1900包括收发模块1901。可选地，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括处理模块1902。该直连链路寻址装置1900可以是前述方法实施例中的第一设备或第二设备。收发模块1901，也可以称为收发单元，用于实现上述任一方法实施例中由第一设备、或第二设备执行的收发功能。
需要说明的是，上述收发模块1901可以包括接收模块和发送模块(图19中未示出)。其中，接收模块用于实现上述任一方法实施例中由第一设备、或第二设备执行的接收功能；发送模块用于实现上述任一方法实施例中由第一设备、或第二设备执行的发送功能。本申请对于收发模块1901的具体实现方式，不做具体限定。
处理模块1902，也可以称为处理单元，可以用于实现上述任一方法实施例中由 第一设备或第二设备执行的处理功能。该处理模块1902可以为处理器。
在本实施例中，该直连链路寻址装置1900以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定ASIC，电路，执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器，集成逻辑电路，和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。在一个简单的实施例中，本领域的技术人员可以想到该直连链路寻址装置1900可以采用图18所示的直连链路寻址装置1800的形式。
比如，图18所示的直连链路寻址装置1800中的处理器1801可以通过调用存储器1802中存储的计算机执行指令，使得直连链路寻址装置1800执行上述方法实施例中的直连链路寻址方法。
具体的，图19中的收发模块1901和处理模块1902的功能/实现过程可以通过图18所示的直连链路寻址装置1800中的处理器1801调用存储器1802中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者，图19中的处理模块1902的功能/实现过程可以通过图18所示的直连链路寻址装置1800中的处理器1801调用存储器1802中存储的计算机执行指令来实现，图19中的收发模块1901的功能/实现过程可以通过图18中所示的直连链路寻址装置1800中的收发器1803来实现。
由于本实施例提供的直连链路寻址装置1900可执行上述直连链路寻址方法，因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的设计方案中，图19所示出的直连链路寻址装置1900可适用于图1所示出的通信系统中，执行图7所示的直连链路寻址方法中第一设备的功能。该直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个或多个站点STA，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。
处理模块1902，用于确定被保护数据。其中，被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。当直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个STA，第一地址为第二设备的地址，第二地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备的第一AP连接。当直连链路寻址装置1900包括多个STA，第一地址为第二设备的地址，第二地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。
收发模块1901，用于发送第一数据单元。第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头是根据被保护数据确定的，第一数据单元是通过直连链路寻址装置1900与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
可选的，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括存储模块(图19中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1902执行该程序或指令时，使得直连链路寻址装置1900可以执行图7所示的直连链路寻址方法中第一设备的功能。
需要说明的是，直连链路寻址装置1900可以是第一设备，也可以是可设置于第一设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，直连链路寻址装置1900的技术效果可以参考图7所示的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
在另一种可能的设计方案中，图19所示出的直连链路寻址装置1900可适用于图 1所示出的通信系统中，执行图7所示的直连链路寻址方法中第二设备的功能。该直连链路寻址装置1900包括多个站点STA，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与第三设备连接，第一设备包括一个或多个STA。
收发模块1901，用于接收第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头是根据被保护数据确定的，第一数据单元是通过第一设备与直连链路寻址装置1900之间的直连链路传输的。被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第一地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第二地址为第一设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第一地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第二地址为第一设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。
可选的，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括处理模块1902和存储模块(图19中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1902执行该程序或指令时，使得直连链路寻址装置1900可以执行图7所示的直连链路寻址方法中第二设备的功能。
需要说明的是，直连链路寻址装置1900可以是第二设备，也可以是可设置于第二设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，直连链路寻址装置1900的技术效果可以参考图7所示的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
在又一种可能的设计方案中，图19所示出的直连链路寻址装置1900可适用于图1所示出的通信系统中，执行图15所示的直连链路寻址方法中第二设备的功能。该直连链路寻址装置1900包括多个站点STA，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与第三设备连接，第一设备包括一个或多个STA。
处理模块1902，用于确定被保护数据。其中，被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。当第一设备包括一个STA，第一地址为第一设备的地址，第二地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第一地址为第一设备的地址，第二地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。
收发模块1901，用于发送第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头是根据被保护数据确定的，第一数据单元是通过第一设备与直连链路寻址装置1900之间的直连链路传输的。
可选的，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括存储模块(图19中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1902执行该程序或指令时，使得直连链路寻址装置1900可以执行图15所示的直连链路寻址方法中第二设备的功能。
需要说明的是，直连链路寻址装置1900可以是第二设备，也可以是可设置于第二设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，直连链路寻址装置1900的技术效果可以参考图15所示的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
在又一种可能的设计方案中，图19所示出的直连链路寻址装置1900可适用于图1所示出的通信系统中，执行图15所示的直连链路寻址方法中第一设备的功能。该直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个或多个站点STA，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。
收发模块1901，用于接收第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头，第一报头是根据被保护数据确定的，第一数据单元是通过直连链路寻址装置1900与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址。当直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个STA，第一地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第二地址为第二设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备的第一AP连接，直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个STA。当直连链路寻址装置1900包括多个STA，第一地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第二地址为第二设备的地址，第三地址为第三设备的地址。
可选的，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括处理模块1902和存储模块(图19中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1902执行该程序或指令时，使得直连链路寻址装置1900可以执行图15所示的直连链路寻址方法中第一设备的功能。
需要说明的是，直连链路寻址装置1900可以是第一设备，也可以是可设置于第一设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，直连链路寻址装置1900的技术效果可以参考图15所示的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
在又一种可能的设计方案中，图19所示出的直连链路寻址装置1900可适用于图1所示出的通信系统中，执行图16所示的直连链路寻址方法中第一设备的功能。该直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个或多个站点STA，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。
处理模块1902，用于确定第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头和隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。当直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备的第一AP连接。当直连链路寻址装置1900包括多个STA，第四地址为第二设备的地址，第五地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为直连链路寻址装置1900与第二设备之间传输TDLS帧的链路。
收发模块1901，用于发送第一数据单元。第一数据单元是通过直连链路寻址装置1900与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
可选的，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括存储模块(图19中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1902执行该程序或指令时，使得直连 链路寻址装置1900可以执行图16所示的直连链路寻址方法中第一设备的功能。
需要说明的是，直连链路寻址装置1900可以是第一设备，也可以是可设置于第一设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，直连链路寻址装置1900的技术效果可以参考图16所示的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
在又一种可能的设计方案中，图19所示出的直连链路寻址装置1900可适用于图1所示出的通信系统中，执行图16所示的直连链路寻址方法中第二设备的功能。该直连链路寻址装置1900包括多个站点STA，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与第三设备连接，第一设备包括一个或多个STA。
收发模块1901，用于接收第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头和隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第五地址为第一设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为第一设备与直连链路寻址装置1900之间传输TDLS帧的链路。第一数据单元是通过第一设备与直连链路寻址装置1900之间的直连链路传输的。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
可选的，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括处理模块1902和存储模块(图19中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1902执行该程序或指令时，使得直连链路寻址装置1900可以执行图16所示的直连链路寻址方法中第二设备的功能。
需要说明的是，直连链路寻址装置1900可以是第二设备，也可以是可设置于第二设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，直连链路寻址装置1900的技术效果可以参考图16所示的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
在又一种可能的设计方案中，图19所示出的直连链路寻址装置1900可适用于图1所示出的通信系统中，执行图17所示的直连链路寻址方法中第二设备的功能。该直连链路寻址装置1900包括多个站点STA，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与第三设备连接，第一设备包括一个或多个STA。
处理模块1902，用于确定第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头和隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
收发模块1901，用于发送第一数据单元。当第一设备包括一个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，第一设备与第三设备的第一AP连接。当第一设备包括多个STA，第四地址为第一设备的地址，第五地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第 六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为第一设备与直连链路寻址装置1900之间传输TDLS帧的链路。第一数据单元是通过第一设备与直连链路寻址装置1900之间的直连链路传输的。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
可选的，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括处理模块1902和存储模块(图19中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1902执行该程序或指令时，使得直连链路寻址装置1900可以执行图17所示的直连链路寻址方法中第二设备的功能。
需要说明的是，直连链路寻址装置1900可以是第二设备，也可以是可设置于第二设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，直连链路寻址装置1900的技术效果可以参考图17所示的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
在又一种可能的设计方案中，图19所示出的直连链路寻址装置1900可适用于图1所示出的通信系统中，执行图17所示的直连链路寻址方法中第一设备的功能。该直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个或多个站点STA，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备连接，第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与第三设备连接，第二设备包括多个STA。
收发模块1901，用于接收第一数据单元。其中，第一数据单元包括第一报头和隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址。
当直连链路寻址装置1900包括一个STA，第四地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的第一AP的地址，直连链路寻址装置1900与第三设备的第一AP连接。当直连链路寻址装置1900包括多个STA，第四地址为直连链路寻址装置1900的地址，第五地址为第二设备的地址，第六地址为第三设备的多个AP中与第六直连链路对应的AP的地址，第六直连链路为直连链路寻址装置1900与第二设备之间传输TDLS帧的链路。第一数据单元是通过直连链路寻址装置1900与第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
可选地，TDLS帧可以为TDLS发现响应帧。
可选的，直连链路寻址装置1900还可以包括处理模块1902和存储模块(图19中未示出)，该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当处理模块1902执行该程序或指令时，使得直连链路寻址装置1900可以执行图17所示的直连链路寻址方法中第一设备的功能。
需要说明的是，直连链路寻址装置1900可以是第一设备，也可以是可设置于第一设备的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件，本申请对此不做限定。
此外，直连链路寻址装置1900的技术效果可以参考图17所示的直连链路寻址方法的技术效果，此处不再赘述。
本申请实施例提供一种通信系统。该通信系统包括：第一设备和第二设备。还可以包括第二设备。其中，第一设备用于执行上述方法实施例中第一设备的动作，具体执行方法和过程可参照上述方法实施例，此处不再赘述。第二设备用于执行上述方法实施例中第二设备的动作，具体执行方法和过程可参照上述方法实施例，此处不再赘 述。第三设备用于执行上述方法实施例中第三设备的动作，具体执行方法和过程可参照上述方法实施例，此处不再赘述。
本申请实施例提供一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器和输入/输出端口，所述处理器用于实现本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法所涉及的处理功能，所述输入/输出端口用于本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法所涉及的收发功能。
在一种可能的设计中，该芯片系统还包括存储器，该存储器用于存储实现本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法所涉及功能的程序指令和数据。
该芯片系统，可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质包括计算机程序或指令，当计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法。
本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序或指令，当计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行本申请实施例提供的直连链路寻址方法。
应理解，在本申请实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
上述实施例，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件(如电路)、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算 机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。
应理解，本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况，其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系，但也可能表示的是一种“和/或”的关系，具体可参考前后文进行理解。
本申请中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以 存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (45)

  1. 一种直连链路建立方法，其特征在于，应用于第一设备，所述第一设备包括一个或多个站点STA，所述第一设备与第三设备连接，所述第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与所述第三设备连接，所述第二设备包括多个STA，所述方法包括：
    确定至少两个隧道直连链路建立发现请求TDLS Discovery Request帧，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括用于指示所述第三设备中的AP的标识字段，不同所述TDLS Discovery Request帧与所述第三设备中的不同AP一一对应；
    发送所述至少两个TDLS Discovery Request帧。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述标识字段为基本服务集标识符BSSID，所述BSSID承载在所述TDLS Discovery Request帧的链路标识元素字段。
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括多链路元素字段，所述多链路元素字段包括Type子字段，所述Type子字段用于指示隧道直连链路建立。
  4. 如权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括多链路元素字段，所述多链路元素字段包括MLD MAC Address字段，所述MLD MAC Address字段用于指示第三设备的MAC地址。
  5. 如权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一设备接收所述第二设备的多个STA中与所述第三设备的AP关联的STA反馈的隧道直连链路建立发现响应TDLS Discovery Response帧。
  6. 如权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第三设备的MAC地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定。
  7. 一种直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，应用于第二设备，所述第二设备包括多个站点STA，所述第二设备与第三设备连接，所述第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与所述第三设备连接，所述第一设备包括一个或多个STA，所述方法包括：
    接收至少两个隧道直连链路建立发现请求TDLS Discovery Request帧，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括用于指示所述第三设备中的AP的标识字段，不同所述TDLS Discovery Request帧与所述第三设备中的不同AP一一对应；
    所述第二设备的多个STA中与所述第三设备的AP关联的STA发送隧道直连链路建立发现响应TDLS Discovery Response帧。
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述标识字段为基本服务集标识符BSSID，所述BSSID承载在所述TDLS Discovery Request帧的链路标识元素字段。
  9. 如权利要求7或8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括多链路元素字段，所述多链路元素字段包括Type子字段，所述Type子字段用于指示隧道直连链路建立。
  10. 如权利要求7至9任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括多链路元素字段，所述多链路元素字段包括MLD MAC Address字段，所述MLD MAC Address字段用于指示第三设备的MAC地址。
  11. 如权利要求7至10任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第三设备的MAC地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定。
  12. 一种第一设备，其特征在于，所述第一设备包括一个或多个站点STA，所述第一设备与第三设备连接，所述第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与所述第三设备连接，所述第二设备包括多个STA，所述第一设备包括：
    处理单元，用于确定至少两个隧道直连链路建立发现请求TDLS Discovery Request帧，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括用于指示所述第三设备中的AP的标识字段，不同所述TDLS Discovery Request帧与所述第三设备中的不同AP一一对应；
    收发单元，用于发送所述至少两个TDLS Discovery Request帧。
  13. 如权利要求12所述的第一设备，其特征在于，所述标识字段为基本服务集标识符BSSID，所述BSSID承载在所述TDLS Discovery Request帧的链路标识元素字段。
  14. 如权利要求12或13所述的第一设备，其特征在于，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括多链路元素字段，所述多链路元素字段包括Type子字段，所述Type子字段用于指示隧道直连链路建立。
  15. 如权利要求12至14任一项所述的第一设备，其特征在于，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括多链路元素字段，所述多链路元素字段包括MLD MAC Address字段，所述MLD MAC Address字段用于指示第三设备的MAC地址。
  16. 如权利要求12至15任一项所述的第一设备，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于接收所述第二设备的多个STA中与所述第三设备的AP关联的STA反馈的隧道直连链路建立发现响应TDLS Discovery Response帧。
  17. 如权利要求12至16任一项所述的第一设备，其特征在于，所述第三设备的MAC地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定。
  18. 一种第二设备，其特征在于，所述第二设备包括多个站点STA，所述第二设备与第三设备连接，所述第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与所述第三设备连接，所述第一设备包括一个或多个STA，所述第二设备包括：
    收发单元，用于接收至少两个隧道直连链路建立发现请求TDLS Discovery Request帧，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括用于指示所述第三设备中的AP的标识字段，不同所述TDLS Discovery Request帧与所述第三设备中的不同AP一一对应；
    所述收发单元还用于所述第二设备的多个STA中与所述第三设备的AP关联的STA发送隧道直连链路建立发现响应TDLS Discovery Response帧。
  19. 如权利要求18所述的第二设备，其特征在于，所述标识字段为基本服务集标识符BSSID，所述BSSID承载在所述TDLS Discovery Request帧的链路标识元素字段。
  20. 如权利要求18或19所述的第二设备，其特征在于，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括多链路元素字段，所述多链路元素字段包括Type子字段，所述Type子字段用于指示隧道直连链路建立。
  21. 如权利要求18至20任一项所述的第二设备，其特征在于，所述TDLS Discovery Request帧包括多链路元素字段，所述多链路元素字段包括MLD MAC  Address字段，所述MLD MAC Address字段用于指示第三设备的MAC地址。
  22. 如权利要求18至21任一项所述的第二设备，其特征在于，所述第三设备的MAC地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定。
  23. 一种直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，应用于第一设备，所述第一设备包括一个或多个站点STA，所述第一设备与第三设备连接，所述第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第二设备与所述第三设备连接，所述第二设备包括多个STA，所述方法包括：
    确定被保护数据；其中，所述被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址；
    当所述第一设备包括一个STA，所述第一地址为所述第二设备的地址，所述第二地址为所述第一设备的地址，所述第三地址为所述第三设备的第一AP的地址，所述第一设备与所述第三设备的所述第一AP连接；
    当所述第一设备包括多个STA，所述第一地址为所述第二设备的地址，所述第二地址为所述第一设备的地址，所述第三地址为所述第三设备的地址；
    发送第一数据单元；其中，所述第一数据单元包括第一报头，所述第一报头是根据所述被保护数据确定的，所述第一数据单元是通过所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址；当所述第一设备包括一个STA，所述第四地址为所述第二设备的地址，所述第五地址为所述第一设备的地址，所述第六地址为所述第三设备的所述第一AP的地址。
  25. 根据权利要求23所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址；当所述第一设备包括多个STA，所述第四地址为所述第二设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，所述第五地址为所述第一设备的多个STA中与所述第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，所述第六地址为所述第三设备的多个AP中与所述第一直连链路对应的AP的地址，所述第一直连链路为所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的直连链路。
  26. 根据权利要求23-25中任一项所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一数据单元包括隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，所述TDLS帧包括第一元素，所述第一元素用于指示目标链路的标识或者所述第三设备的多个AP中与所述目标链路对应的AP的地址，所述目标链路为所述TDLS帧应用的第二直连链路，所述第二直连链路为所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的直连链路。
  27. 根据权利要求23-25中任一项所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一数据单元包括隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，所述TDLS帧包括唤醒调度元素和第二元素，所述唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于第三直连链路的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，所述第二元素用于指示所述第三直连链路的标识或者所述第三设备的多个AP中与所述第三直连链路对应的AP的地址，所述第三直连链路为所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的直连链路。
  28. 根据权利要求23-27中任一项所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一数据单元包括第三元素，所述第三元素用于指示在第一链路上建立至少一条第四直连链路，所述第一链路为所述第一设备与所述第三设备之间的链路、所述第二设备与 所述第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，所述第一链路包括所述至少一条第四直连链路。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第三元素包括直连链路数量字段和直连链路标识符字段，所述直连链路数量字段用于指示请求建立的所述第四直连链路的数量，所述直连链路标识符字段包括所述第三设备的多个AP中分别与所述至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址或所述至少一条第四直连链路的标识。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述直连链路标识符字段还包括所述第一设备的第一STA的地址和所述第二设备的第二STA的地址。
  31. 根据权利要求23-30中任一项所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，第七地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定，所述第七地址包括所述第三设备的多个AP中与所述第一设备和所述第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址或者所述第三设备的所有AP的地址、以及所述第三设备的地址。
  32. 一种直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，应用于第二设备，所述第二设备包括多个站点STA，所述第二设备与第三设备连接，所述第三设备包括多个接入点AP，第一设备与所述第三设备连接，所述第一设备包括一个或多个STA，所述方法包括：
    确定被保护数据；其中，所述被保护数据包括第一地址、第二地址和第三地址；
    当所述第一设备包括一个STA，所述第一地址为所述第一设备的地址，所述第二地址为所述第二设备的地址，所述第三地址为所述第三设备的第一AP的地址，所述第一设备与所述第三设备的所述第一AP连接；
    当所述第一设备包括多个STA，所述第一地址为所述第一设备的地址，所述第二地址为所述第二设备的地址，所述第三地址为所述第三设备的地址；
    发送第一数据单元；其中，所述第一数据单元包括第一报头，所述第一报头是根据所述被保护数据确定的，所述第一数据单元是通过所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的直连链路传输的。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址；当所述第一设备包括一个STA，所述第四地址为所述第一设备的地址，所述第五地址为所述第二设备的地址，所述第六地址为所述第三设备的所述第一AP的地址。
  34. 根据权利要求32所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一报头包括第四地址、第五地址和第六地址；当所述第一设备包括多个STA，所述第四地址为所述第一设备的多个STA中与第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，所述第五地址为所述第二设备的多个STA中与所述第一直连链路对应的STA的地址，所述第六地址为所述第三设备的多个AP中与所述第一直连链路对应的AP的地址，所述第一直连链路为所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的直连链路。
  35. 根据权利要求32-34中任一项所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一数据单元包括隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，所述TDLS帧包括第一元素，所述第一元素用于指示目标链路的标识或者所述第三设备的多个AP中与所述目标链路对应的AP的地址，所述目标链路为所述TDLS帧应用的第二直连链路，所述第二直连链路 为所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的直连链路。
  36. 根据权利要求32-34中任一项所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一数据单元包括隧道直连链路建立TDLS帧，所述TDLS帧包括唤醒调度元素和第二元素，所述唤醒调度元素中的偏移量字段是相对于第三直连链路的第一定时同步功能阈值的偏移量，所述第二元素用于指示所述第三直连链路的标识或者所述第三设备的多个AP中与所述第三直连链路对应的AP的地址，所述第三直连链路为所述第一设备与所述第二设备之间的直连链路。
  37. 根据权利要求32-36中任一项所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第一数据单元包括第三元素，所述第三元素用于指示在第一链路上建立至少一条第四直连链路，所述第一链路为所述第一设备与所述第三设备之间的链路、所述第二设备与所述第三设备之间的链路的共同链路，所述第一链路包括所述至少一条第四直连链路。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述第三元素包括直连链路数量字段和直连链路标识符字段，所述直连链路数量字段用于指示请求建立的所述第四直连链路的数量，所述直连链路标识符字段包括所述第三设备的多个AP中分别与所述至少一条第四直连链路对应的至少一个AP的地址或所述至少一条第四直连链路的标识。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，所述直连链路标识符字段还包括所述第一设备的第一STA的地址和所述第二设备的第二STA的地址。
  40. 根据权利要求32-39中任一项所述的直连链路寻址方法，其特征在于，第七地址与TDLS对等秘钥TPK绑定，所述第七地址包括所述第三设备的多个AP中与所述第一设备和所述第二设备之间的直连链路对应的AP的地址或者所述第三设备的所有AP的地址、以及所述第三设备的地址。
  41. 一种直连链路寻址装置，其特征在于，所述直连链路寻址装置包括用于执行如权利要求1至6或23至31中任一项所述方法的单元或模块。
  42. 一种直连链路寻址装置，其特征在于，所述直连链路寻址装置包括用于执行如权利要求7至11或32至40中任一项所述方法的单元或模块。
  43. 一种直连链路寻址装置，其特征在于，所述直连链路寻址装置包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合；
    所述存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    所述处理器，用于执行所述存储器中存储的所述计算机程序，以使得所述直连链路寻址装置执行如权利要求1至11或23至40中任一项所述的方法。
  44. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至11或23至40中任一项所述的方法。
  45. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序或指令，当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至11或23至40中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/078704 2021-03-15 2022-03-02 直连链路寻址方法及装置 WO2022193945A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2022235791A AU2022235791A1 (en) 2021-03-15 2022-03-02 Method and device for direct link addressing
JP2023557218A JP2024511040A (ja) 2021-03-15 2022-03-02 ダイレクトリンクアドレス指定方法およびダイレクトリンクアドレス指定装置
CA3213623A CA3213623A1 (en) 2021-03-15 2022-03-02 Direct link addressing method and apparatus
KR1020237034796A KR20230152764A (ko) 2021-03-15 2022-03-02 직접 링크 어드레싱 방법 및 장치
EP22770300.6A EP4294064A1 (en) 2021-03-15 2022-03-02 Method and device for direct link addressing
BR112023018589A BR112023018589A2 (pt) 2021-03-15 2022-03-02 Método e aparelho de endereçamento de conexão direta
US18/467,776 US20240008113A1 (en) 2021-03-15 2023-09-15 Direct link addressing method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110278095.3A CN115086945A (zh) 2021-03-15 2021-03-15 直连链路寻址方法及装置
CN202110278095.3 2021-03-15

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/467,776 Continuation US20240008113A1 (en) 2021-03-15 2023-09-15 Direct link addressing method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022193945A1 true WO2022193945A1 (zh) 2022-09-22

Family

ID=83245842

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/078704 WO2022193945A1 (zh) 2021-03-15 2022-03-02 直连链路寻址方法及装置

Country Status (10)

Country Link
US (1) US20240008113A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4294064A1 (zh)
JP (1) JP2024511040A (zh)
KR (1) KR20230152764A (zh)
CN (2) CN116405928B (zh)
AU (1) AU2022235791A1 (zh)
BR (1) BR112023018589A2 (zh)
CA (1) CA3213623A1 (zh)
TW (2) TW202337263A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022193945A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024023041A1 (en) * 2022-07-29 2024-02-01 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha P2p communication method and system with multi-link tdls direct link

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104221345A (zh) * 2011-12-22 2014-12-17 高通股份有限公司 用于隧穿直接链路建立的ip地址发现
CN105025592A (zh) * 2009-09-18 2015-11-04 交互数字专利控股公司 一种在sta中使用的方法及sta
US20150351018A1 (en) * 2013-01-09 2015-12-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Discovery method and device in a wireless communication system
US20210014911A1 (en) * 2019-07-12 2021-01-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Multi-link communication
CN113973400A (zh) * 2020-07-24 2022-01-25 华为技术有限公司 建立直连链路、无线局域网帧发送的方法、装置及系统

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8908862B2 (en) * 2012-04-05 2014-12-09 Stmicroelectronics, Inc. Method, system, and devices for fast session transfer of wireless devices from one frequency band to another
CN104125652A (zh) * 2013-04-25 2014-10-29 华为技术有限公司 中继链路的建立方法、站点和系统
US20160105829A1 (en) * 2014-10-14 2016-04-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Direct link wireless devices with power savings
CN107534604B (zh) * 2015-05-29 2020-05-08 华为技术有限公司 一种数据处理方法及装置

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105025592A (zh) * 2009-09-18 2015-11-04 交互数字专利控股公司 一种在sta中使用的方法及sta
CN104221345A (zh) * 2011-12-22 2014-12-17 高通股份有限公司 用于隧穿直接链路建立的ip地址发现
US20150351018A1 (en) * 2013-01-09 2015-12-03 Lg Electronics Inc. Discovery method and device in a wireless communication system
US20210014911A1 (en) * 2019-07-12 2021-01-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Multi-link communication
CN113973400A (zh) * 2020-07-24 2022-01-25 华为技术有限公司 建立直连链路、无线局域网帧发送的方法、装置及系统

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024023041A1 (en) * 2022-07-29 2024-02-01 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha P2p communication method and system with multi-link tdls direct link

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20240008113A1 (en) 2024-01-04
CN116405928A (zh) 2023-07-07
TW202239256A (zh) 2022-10-01
CN115086945A (zh) 2022-09-20
TWI805263B (zh) 2023-06-11
CA3213623A1 (en) 2022-09-22
AU2022235791A1 (en) 2023-09-21
JP2024511040A (ja) 2024-03-12
TW202337263A (zh) 2023-09-16
EP4294064A1 (en) 2023-12-20
BR112023018589A2 (pt) 2023-10-24
CN116405928B (zh) 2023-12-29
KR20230152764A (ko) 2023-11-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3018967B1 (en) Setting up a direct link in a peer to peer wireless network
JP6055926B2 (ja) 無線ｌａｎシステムにおいて連携を維持するための方法及びそのための装置
JP6173483B2 (ja) 無線ｌａｎシステムの中継ネットワークにおいてマルチキャスト／ブロードキャストを行う方法及び装置
KR101632222B1 (ko) 무선랜 시스템에서 고속 링크 동기화 방법 및 장치
US11924823B2 (en) Multi-link device association and reassociation
US20130235790A1 (en) Systems and methods for establishing a connection setup through relays
WO2011005062A2 (ko) 무선랜 시스템에서의 스테이션의 전력 관리 방법 및 이를 지원하는 스테이션
KR20140129005A (ko) 무선랜 시스템에서 필터링 기반 스캐닝 방법 및 장치
US9319902B2 (en) Method for receiving downlink signal by station in wireless communication system
EP4050922A1 (en) Multi-band communication and interface parameter update methods and related devices
US20240008113A1 (en) Direct link addressing method and apparatus
WO2014069870A1 (ko) 무선랜 시스템에서 고속 링크 동기화 방법 및 장치
WO2022052863A1 (zh) 无线局域网中块确认会话的管理方法及装置
US20240090056A1 (en) Multi-Access Point Association
US20240089891A1 (en) Multi-Access Point Association
WO2024065461A1 (zh) 多链路通信的方法及设备
WO2024098796A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2023092487A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法和设备
WO2022242749A1 (zh) 数据传输方法、通信装置、计算机可读存储介质和芯片

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22770300

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2022235791

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2022770300

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2023/010773

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 3213623

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023557218

Country of ref document: JP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022235791

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20220302

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022770300

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230912

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112023018589

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20237034796

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020237034796

Country of ref document: KR

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112023018589

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20230913

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 11202306820U

Country of ref document: SG